WO2021073471A1 - Sending end, receiving end, and bandwidth switching method - Google Patents

Sending end, receiving end, and bandwidth switching method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021073471A1
WO2021073471A1 PCT/CN2020/120343 CN2020120343W WO2021073471A1 WO 2021073471 A1 WO2021073471 A1 WO 2021073471A1 CN 2020120343 W CN2020120343 W CN 2020120343W WO 2021073471 A1 WO2021073471 A1 WO 2021073471A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
information
frame
switching
symbol
bandwidth
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/120343
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
朱凯
蒋冰
袁天
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2021073471A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021073471A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the communication field, and in particular, to a sending end, a receiving end, and a bandwidth switching method.
  • throughput refers to the number of payload bits transmitted per unit time.
  • the larger the transmission capacity the more data is transmitted per unit time. Therefore, the larger the transmission capacity, the easier it is to meet the user's data transmission needs.
  • the size of the transmission capacity is positively correlated with the size of the symbol bandwidth. Therefore, the symbol bandwidth can be adjusted to adjust the transmission capacity.
  • the sending end will first interrupt the transmission using the first symbol bandwidth. Service, and then establish a transmission using the second symbol bandwidth between the sending end and the receiving end. After the new transmission is established, the sending end is using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service to the receiving end.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a sending end, a receiving end, and a bandwidth switching method, which are used to adjust the symbol bandwidth for transmitting service information between the sending end and the receiving end without interrupting services.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a sending end, and the sending end includes the following parts: a receiving module and a sending module.
  • the receiving module is used to receive business information.
  • the sending module is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to send the service information to the receiving end, and the service information is located in the first frame.
  • the sending module is further configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the service information and redundant information to the receiving end, where the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame.
  • the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
  • the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries switching information in addition to the service information, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but also the The receiving end obtains the service information from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service.
  • the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used for Indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second cycle, the second cycle corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second cycle is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, The number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
  • the switching information when the switching information is the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step corresponds to the switching step in a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification and the switching step. In such an implementation manner, since the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits, the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame. Carry more business information.
  • the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
  • the switching information is the second period
  • the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth
  • the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step.
  • this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
  • the handover information includes the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information
  • the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when this frame is determined
  • the number of symbols transmitted in, the time length of transmitting each symbol can be calculated, that is, the aforementioned second period. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end.
  • the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information.
  • the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
  • the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. frequency.
  • the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame, which is beneficial to the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent switching operation.
  • the sending end It also includes a processing module; the processing module is used to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame.
  • the processing module includes a first-in first-out module FIFO and a selector.
  • the FIFO is used to buffer the service information and input the service information to the selector; the selector is used to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame, and follow the first The second frame is output at the frequency corresponding to the two cycles.
  • the processing module includes a random access memory RAM, and the RAM is used to cache the business information.
  • the redundant information is configured to obtain the second frame, and the second frame is output according to the frequency corresponding to the second period.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a receiving end, which includes the following parts: a receiving module, configured to receive service information from the sending end using a first symbol bandwidth, the service information being located in a first frame.
  • the receiving module is also configured to receive the service information and redundant information from the sending end using the second symbol bandwidth, the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame, and the first symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the service
  • the duration of the information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
  • the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries switching information in addition to the service information, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but also the The receiving end obtains the service information from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service.
  • the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used for Indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second cycle, the second cycle corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second cycle is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, The number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
  • the switching information when the switching information is the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step corresponds to the switching step in a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification and the switching step. In such an implementation manner, since the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits, the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame. Carry more business information.
  • the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
  • the switching information is the second period
  • the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth
  • the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step.
  • this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
  • the handover information includes the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information
  • the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when this frame is determined
  • the number of symbols transmitted in, the time length of transmitting each symbol can be calculated, that is, the aforementioned second period. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end.
  • the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information.
  • the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
  • the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. frequency.
  • the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame, which is beneficial for the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent switching operation.
  • the receiving end It includes a processing module; the processing module is used to extract the switching information from the first frame; the processing module is also used to adjust the sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period.
  • the processing module is beneficial to compensate for the frequency deviation of the transceiver and improve the efficiency of symbol bandwidth switching.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a sending end, and the sending end includes the following parts: a receiving module configured to receive first information of a service and second information of the service.
  • the sending module is configured to send the first information to the receiving end using the first symbol bandwidth, and the first information is located in the first frame.
  • the sending module is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the second information to the receiving end.
  • the second information is located in the second frame.
  • the symbol bandwidth has the same duration for transmitting the second information, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame.
  • the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Because, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted.
  • both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol.
  • the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
  • the receiving end since the first frame sent by the sending end to the receiving end carries switching information in addition to the first information of the service, not only can the receiving end be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth, but also The receiving end may obtain the first information from the first frame to ensure the continuous operation of the service.
  • the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used for Indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second cycle, the second cycle corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second cycle is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, The number of symbols carrying the second information.
  • the switching information when the switching information is the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step corresponds to the switching step in a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification and the switching step. In such an implementation manner, since the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits, the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame. Carry more business information.
  • the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
  • the switching information is the second period
  • the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth
  • the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step.
  • this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
  • the handover information includes the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information
  • the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when this frame is determined
  • the number of symbols transmitted in, the time length of transmitting each symbol can be calculated, that is, the aforementioned second period. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end.
  • the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information.
  • the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
  • the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. frequency.
  • the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame, which is beneficial for the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent switching operation.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a receiving end.
  • the receiving end includes the following parts: a receiving module for receiving first information of a service from the transmitting end using a first symbol bandwidth, the first information being located in the first frame in.
  • the receiving module is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second information of the service from the transmitting end, the second information is located in the second frame, and the first symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the first information and the length of time
  • the second symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the second information for the same duration, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame.
  • the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
  • the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries switching information in addition to the service information, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but also the The receiving end obtains the service information from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service.
  • the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used To indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second period, the second period corresponding to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or , The number of symbols carrying the second information.
  • the switching information when the switching information is the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step corresponds to the switching step in a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification and the switching step. In such an implementation manner, since the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits, the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame. Carry more business information.
  • the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
  • the switching information is the second period
  • the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth
  • the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step.
  • this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
  • the handover information includes the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information
  • the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when this frame is determined
  • the number of symbols transmitted in, the time length of transmitting each symbol can be calculated, that is, the aforementioned second period. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end.
  • the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information.
  • the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
  • the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is that the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. The number of times.
  • the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame, which is beneficial for the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent switching operation.
  • the receiving end Including processing modules.
  • the processing module is used to extract the switching information from the first frame.
  • the processing module is further configured to adjust the sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period.
  • the processing module is beneficial to compensate for the frequency deviation of the transceiver and improve the efficiency of symbol bandwidth switching.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a bandwidth switching method.
  • the sending end receives service information, and then the sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the service information to the receiving end, where the service information is located in In the first frame. Then, the sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the service information and redundant information to the receiving end, where the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame.
  • the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the method further includes: the sending end receives confirmation information from the receiving end, the confirmation information being used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information .
  • the sending end since the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information, it is beneficial for the sending end to learn that the receiving end demodulates the first frame. Therefore, the sending end does not need to wait any longer after receiving the confirmation information, and the sending end can send the second frame to the receiving end. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the time delay of data transmission between the sender and the receiver, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the method further includes: the transmitting end receives transmission quality information from the receiving end, and the transmission quality The information is used to indicate the quality of the receiving end that uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame.
  • the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Therefore, the sending end can enable the symbol bandwidth to be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a bandwidth switching method.
  • the receiving end uses the first symbol bandwidth to receive service information from the sending end, and the service information is located in the first frame. Then, the receiving end uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the service information and the redundant information from the sending end, where the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame.
  • the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the method further includes: the receiving end sends confirmation information to the sending end, the confirmation information being used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information .
  • the sending end since the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information, it is beneficial for the sending end to learn that the receiving end demodulates the first frame. Therefore, the sending end does not need to wait any longer after receiving the confirmation information, and the sending end can send the second frame to the receiving end. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the time delay of data transmission between the sender and the receiver, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the method further includes: the receiving end sends transmission quality information to the sending end, and the transmission quality The information is used to indicate the quality of the receiving end that uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame.
  • the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Therefore, the sending end can enable the symbol bandwidth to be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a bandwidth switching method, in which the sending end receives the first information of the service and the second information of the service. Then, the sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the first information to the receiving end, and the first information is located in the first frame. Then, the sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the second information to the receiving end. The second information is located in the second frame. The first information is transmitted using the first symbol bandwidth and the second symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the second information. The duration of the second information is the same, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame.
  • the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Because, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted.
  • both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol.
  • the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the method further includes: the sending end receives confirmation information from the receiving end, the confirmation information being used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information .
  • the sending end since the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information, it is beneficial for the sending end to learn that the receiving end demodulates the first frame. Therefore, the sending end does not need to wait any longer after receiving the confirmation information, and the sending end can send the second frame to the receiving end. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the time delay of data transmission between the sender and the receiver, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the method further includes: the transmitting end receives the transmission quality information from the receiving end, and the transmission quality The information is used to indicate the quality of the receiving end that uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame.
  • the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Therefore, the sending end can enable the symbol bandwidth to be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a bandwidth switching method.
  • the receiving end uses the first symbol bandwidth to receive first information of the service from the transmitting end, and the first information is located in the first frame.
  • the receiving end uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second information of the service from the sending end, and the second information is located in the second frame.
  • the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than that in the second frame The number of symbols carrying the second information.
  • the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the method further includes: the receiving end sends confirmation information to the sending end, the confirmation information being used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information .
  • the sending end since the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information, it is beneficial for the sending end to learn that the receiving end demodulates the first frame. Therefore, the sending end does not need to wait any longer after receiving the confirmation information, and the sending end can send the second frame to the receiving end. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the time delay of data transmission between the sender and the receiver, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
  • the method further includes: the receiving end sends transmission quality information to the sending end, and the transmission quality The information is used to indicate the quality of the receiving end that uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame.
  • the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Therefore, the sending end can enable the symbol bandwidth to be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including: a sending end and a receiving end; the sending end executes the methods described in the fifth aspect and various implementation manners of the fifth aspect; the receiving end executes The sixth aspect and the methods introduced in the various implementations of the sixth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including; a sending end and a receiving end; the sending end executes the methods described in the seventh aspect and various implementation manners of the seventh aspect; the receiving end executes The eighth aspect and the methods introduced in various implementation manners of the eighth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the fifth aspect and various implementation manners of the fifth aspect, or the sixth aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the fifth aspect and various implementation manners of the fifth aspect, or the sixth aspect and The methods introduced in the various implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the seventh aspect and the seventh aspect, or the eighth aspect and the eighth aspect.
  • the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • FIG. 1A is an application scenario diagram of the bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 1B is another application scenario diagram of the bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 1C is a schematic diagram of a bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 1D is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 1E is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 1F is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the receiving end in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 1G is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application.
  • 2B is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of the application.
  • 2C is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of the application.
  • 2D is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2D-1 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a first frame structure in an embodiment of this application.
  • 2D-2 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a second frame structure in an embodiment of the application.
  • 2E is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application.
  • 2E-1 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the first frame structure in an embodiment of the application.
  • 2E-2 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the second frame structure in an embodiment of this application.
  • 2F is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in the embodiment of this application.
  • 3C is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in the embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 3D is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in the embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 3E is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of the application.
  • Fig. 5 is another flowchart of the bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of the application.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a sending end, a receiving end, and a bandwidth switching method, which are used to adjust the symbol bandwidth for transmitting service information between the sending end and the receiving end without interrupting services.
  • Transmission capacity Refers to the number of payload bits transmitted in a unit time, in Mbps or M ⁇ bit/s.
  • M is the modulation mode (M-ary Modulation)
  • R is the code rate (rate), the unit is %, which represents the ratio of payload bits to the bits of the transmitted symbol.
  • each transmitted symbol has 8 bits, of which 6 bits are payload bits and 2 bits are overhead. Therefore, the code rate is 75%.
  • F is the symbol frequency (symbol frequency), the unit is MHz, which represents the frequency range occupied by the various frequency components contained in the transmitted symbol, that is, the frequency of the transmitted symbol, and is also called the frequency domain signal width or channel bandwidth.
  • 1/F is the period, which refers to the length of time that one symbol is sent using the symbol bandwidth.
  • the unit of the symbol bandwidth F when the unit of the symbol bandwidth F is MHz, the unit of the period 1/F is us; when the unit of the symbol bandwidth F is KHz, the unit of the period 1/F is ms; when the unit of the symbol bandwidth F is When the unit is Hz, the unit of this period 1/F is s.
  • transmission symbol or constellation symbol also known as transmission symbol or constellation symbol, it refers to a transmission unit obtained by modulating multiple bits.
  • Modulation mapping also known as constellation mapping or constellation modulation, it refers to a type of modulation method that can map multiple bits into one transmission unit, that is, modulate multiple bits into one symbol. For example, quadrature phase shift keying (quadrature phase shift keying, QPSK) modulation, binary phase shift keying (binary phase shift keying, BPSK) modulation, and quadrature amplitude modulation (quadrature amplitude modulation, QAM), etc.
  • quadrature phase shift keying quadrature phase shift keying
  • QPSK quadrature phase shift keying
  • BPSK binary phase shift keying
  • QAM quadrature amplitude modulation
  • Random access memory It is an internal memory that directly exchanges data with a central processing unit (CPU). Information can be written (stored in) or read (taken out) from any designated address at any time, and is usually used as a temporary data storage medium for operating systems or other running programs.
  • Crystal oscillator also known as quartz crystal resonator, crystal oscillator for short, refers to the crystal element that adds an integrated circuit (IC) to form an oscillator circuit, which can generate a standard pulse signal as a synchronous clock in a digital circuit .
  • IC integrated circuit
  • Root raised cosine filter also known as square root raised cosine filter (SRRC), used to eliminate inter-symbol interference (ISI) and improve reception The sampling accuracy of the signal received at the end.
  • SRRC square root raised cosine filter
  • Interpolation filter used to interpolate between discrete signals to change the sampling rate of the signal.
  • the sending end and the receiving end are located in two different network devices.
  • the aforementioned sending end and the aforementioned receiving end will use the bandwidth switching method proposed in the embodiment of the present application to switch the symbol bandwidth.
  • the sending end may be a device or a chip in the device, and the receiving end may also be a device or a chip in the device, which is not specifically limited here. Whether as a device or as a chip, the sending end or the receiving end can be manufactured, sold, or used as an independent product.
  • the sending end and the receiving end are often manufactured as chips.
  • the sending end and the receiving end can be integrated into a chip, that is, the chip has both the function of the sending end and the function of the receiving end. At this time, it is sufficient to install a chip in the network device 1 and the network device 2 respectively.
  • the sending end and the receiving end can also be manufactured as two chips with different functions, that is, one chip has the function of the sending end, and the other chip has the function of the receiving end. At this time, both the network device 1 and the network device 2 need to install a chip with a transmitter function and a chip with a receiver function. It should be understood that in actual applications, the number of chips in each of the aforementioned network devices will vary due to different application scenarios, and the specific number is not limited here.
  • the aforementioned network equipment may be a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) equipment.
  • the RAN device may be a base station or an access point, or a device that communicates with the terminal device through one or more cells on the air interface in the access network.
  • the RAN equipment can be the next generation node B (gNB) in the new wireless NR system, or the centralized unit (CU) and distributed unit in the Cloud RAN system. (distributed unit, DU), the embodiment of this application is not limited.
  • the aforementioned network device may also be a wireless network backhaul device (radio backhaul), which is specifically used for communication between the base station and the base station from the remote site to the central site.
  • the aforementioned network equipment may also be an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) base station, which is not specifically limited here.
  • IAB integrated access and backhaul
  • the bandwidth switching method can also be applied to other continuous transmission scenarios, such as optical fiber transmission scenarios, broadband access scenarios in cable television mode, and various digital subscriber lines ( Digital subscriber line (DSL) transmission scenarios and microwave communication scenarios, etc., are not specifically limited here.
  • DSL Digital subscriber line
  • the unit of data transmission between the sending end and the receiving end can be a frame, and a frame contains multiple symbols. Among them, each symbol contains multiple information bits that need to be transmitted between the sender and the receiver.
  • the foregoing multiple information bits can be modulated and mapped to form the foregoing one symbol. For example, if two bits are divided into a group for modulation, the aforementioned two bits can be QPSK modulated into one symbol. It should be understood that in actual applications, different modulation and mapping modes can be used according to different scene requirements, and the specifics are not limited here.
  • the clock generated by the crystal oscillator at the transmitting end is partially offset from the clock generated by the crystal oscillator at the receiving end, the clock at the transmitting end is not completely synchronized with the clock at the receiving end.
  • installing a symbol synchronization loop at the receiving end can keep the clock of the receiving end synchronized with the clock of the sending end. Therefore, when the sending end and the receiving end negotiate in advance the number of symbols contained in one or more frames and the time required to send each symbol, the sending end sends a frame to the receiving end at the same time, the receiving end The end can receive the frame at the rate at which the sender sends the frame, that is, the symbol bandwidth of the frame sent by the sender is the same as the symbol bandwidth of the frame received by the receiver.
  • the sending end can adjust the symbol bandwidth by adjusting the duration of sending each symbol in the frame. Since the symbol bandwidth is inversely related to the duration of each symbol sent by the transmitter, the symbol bandwidth can be increased by reducing the duration of each symbol sent by the transmitter, and the duration of each symbol sent by the transmitter can be increased to reduce Small symbol bandwidth.
  • the frame structure shown in FIG. 1C is taken as an example for introduction. It is assumed that the clocks of the sending end and the receiving end are synchronized, and it is negotiated in advance that a frame contains 200 symbols, where the 200 symbols include the frame header preamble and payload symbols. For example, the 1st to 10th symbols are the preamble part of the frame header, and the 11th to 200th symbols are the payload symbol part, and the payload symbol part is the information that actually needs to be transmitted. In practical applications, the number of symbols included in the preamble part of the frame header and the number of symbols included in the payload symbol part can be adjusted according to specific requirements, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the time required for the sending end to send a frame is T
  • the time required for the sending end to send each symbol is T/200
  • the symbol bandwidth is 200/T.
  • the sending end can reduce the time to send each symbol. For example, if the time for sending each symbol is adjusted to T/205, at this time, the sending end can send 205 symbols within the original time of sending 200 symbols. Therefore, the transmitter will configure 5 symbols after the aforementioned 200 symbols, and these 5 symbols are redundant symbols configured to maintain time synchronization.
  • the receiving end needs to adjust the time of receiving each symbol to T/205 according to the instructions of the sending end to ensure synchronization with the sending end.
  • the receiving end adjusts the time for receiving each symbol to T/205
  • the receiving end also adjusts the symbol bandwidth to 205/T. Thus, the switching of the symbol bandwidth is completed.
  • FIG. 1C is only an example for introducing the principle of adjusting the symbol bandwidth, and does not limit the frame structure in this embodiment and subsequent embodiments.
  • the sending end 10 includes a receiving module 101 and a sending module 102.
  • the receiving module 101 is configured to receive service information
  • the service information refers to information of the service performed between the sending end and the receiving end.
  • the sending module 102 is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to send the service information to the receiving end.
  • the service information is located in the first frame, that is, the data transmission between the sending end and the receiving end is in units of frames, and the sending module 102 sends the service information to the receiving end through the first frame.
  • the sending module 102 is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the service information and redundant information to the receiving end.
  • the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame, that is, the sending module 102 encapsulates the service information and the redundant information in the second frame to send to the receiving end.
  • the foregoing first symbol bandwidth is smaller than the foregoing second symbol bandwidth.
  • the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the sending end also includes a processing module 103.
  • the processing module 103 is configured to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame. Then, the processing module 103 transmits the second frame to the sending module 102, so that the sending module 102 sends the second frame to the receiving end.
  • the receiving module 101 in the sending end 10 in FIG. 1D may be the switching information receiving module 202 in FIG. 2A later
  • the sending module 102 may be the first transceiver module 205 in FIG. 2A later
  • the processing module 103 includes the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, the first switching controller 201, and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 in FIG. 2A below.
  • processing module 103 may adopt the following implementation modes:
  • the processing module 103 includes a first-in first-out module FIFO and a selector.
  • the FIFO is used to buffer the business information and input the business information to the selector.
  • the selector is configured to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame, and output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second period.
  • the processing module may adopt the implementation manner of the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 in FIG. 2A below.
  • the specific functions of the aforementioned FIFO and the aforementioned selector please refer to the related introduction of the FIFO 2031 and the selector 2032 in FIG. 2B later, and the details will not be repeated here.
  • the processing module 103 includes a random access memory RAM, which is used to cache the service information, configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame, and follow The second frame is output at the frequency corresponding to the second period.
  • the processing module may adopt the implementation manner of the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 in FIG. 2A below.
  • the specific functions of the aforementioned RAM can be referred to the related introduction in RAM 2033 in FIG. 2C later, and details are not repeated here.
  • the aforementioned first frame further includes switching information, which is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step.
  • both the sending end and the receiving end store a correspondence table of the identification of the switching step and the switching step.
  • the correspondence table may be as shown in Table 1 below:
  • the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end
  • the receiving end can search for the above
  • the corresponding relationship table learns the switching step.
  • the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits
  • the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the foregoing first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame.
  • the frame carries more business information.
  • the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step.
  • the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
  • the switching information may be a second period, where the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth, and the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth. Also, since the size of the first symbol bandwidth is known to the receiving end, the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step. Compared with the foregoing implementation, this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
  • the switching information may include the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information. Since the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when the number of symbols transmitted in this frame is determined, the duration of each symbol can be calculated, that is, the second cycle. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end. In addition, although the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information.
  • the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
  • the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Therefore, the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame. It is helpful for the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent handover operation.
  • the sending end 10 includes a receiving module 101 and a sending module 102.
  • the receiving module 101 is used to receive the first information of the service and the second information of the service.
  • the service is the service currently transmitted between the sending end and the receiving end.
  • the sending module 102 is configured to send the first information to the receiving end using the first symbol bandwidth, and the first information is located in the first frame. That is, the data transmission between the sending end and the receiving end is in units of frames, and the sending module 102 sends the first information to the receiving end through the first frame.
  • the sending module 102 is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the second information to the receiving end.
  • the second information is located in the second frame, that is, the sending module 102 only sends the second information in the second frame.
  • the foregoing first symbol bandwidth is greater than the foregoing second symbol bandwidth.
  • the time length of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the first information is the same as the time length of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the second information.
  • the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Because, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted.
  • both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol.
  • the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the aforementioned first frame further includes switching information, which is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step.
  • the details are similar to the foregoing Table 1, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step.
  • the switching information may be a second period, the second period corresponding to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information may include the number of symbols of the second information.
  • the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the receiving end 11 When the receiving end performs the function of increasing the symbol bandwidth, as shown in FIG. 1F, the receiving end 11 includes a receiving module 111 and a processing module 112. Wherein, the receiving module 111 is configured to receive service information from the sending end using the first symbol bandwidth, and the service information is located in the first frame. In addition, the receiving module 111 is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the service information and redundant information from the sending end. Wherein, the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame. In addition, the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the foregoing first symbol bandwidth is smaller than the foregoing second symbol bandwidth.
  • the time length of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the time length of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  • the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the aforementioned processing module 112 is configured to extract the switching information from the aforementioned first frame, and adjust the sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period.
  • the aforementioned first frame further includes switching information, and the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second period, the second period Corresponding to one switching step, the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
  • the switching information also includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is the same as the switching information when the transmitting end performs the function of increasing the symbol bandwidth in the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the receiving module 111 in the receiving end 11 in FIG. 1F may be the second transceiving module 304 in FIG. 3A below, and the processing module 112 may be the second switching controller 301 and the symbol bandwidth in FIG. 3A below.
  • Synchronization ring 302, switching information extraction module 303 Specifically, please refer to the related introduction in Figure 3A below.
  • the receiving end 11 When the receiving end performs the function of reducing the symbol bandwidth, as shown in FIG. 1G, the receiving end 11 includes a receiving module 111 and a processing module 112. Wherein, the receiving module 111 is configured to receive the first information of the service from the transmitting end by using the first symbol bandwidth, and the first information is located in the first frame. In addition, the receiving module 111 is further configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive second information of the service from the sending end, and the second information is located in the second frame. In addition, the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the second information. The number of symbols carrying the second information in the frame.
  • the foregoing first symbol bandwidth is greater than the foregoing second symbol bandwidth.
  • the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the aforementioned processing module 112 is configured to extract the switching information from the aforementioned first frame, and adjust the sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period.
  • the aforementioned first frame further includes switching information, and the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second period, the second period Corresponding to one switching step, the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, the number of symbols carrying the second information.
  • the switching information also includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is the same as the switching information when the transmitting end performs the function of reducing the symbol bandwidth in the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end 20 when the sending end performs the function of increasing the symbol bandwidth, the sending end 20 includes a first switching controller 201, a switching information receiving module 202, a symbol bandwidth adapting module 203, a symbol bandwidth enabling module 204, and The first transceiver module 205.
  • the first switching controller 201 is connected to the switching information receiving module 202 and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 respectively, and the symbol bandwidth adapting module 203 is connected to the switching information receiving module 202 and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 respectively.
  • the first switching controller 204 is configured to send switching information to the switching information receiving module 202.
  • the switching information is used to instruct to switch the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step.
  • the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end
  • the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification of the switching step and the switching step inside the receiving end.
  • the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step.
  • the switching information may be a second period, where the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth, and the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information may include the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
  • the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step.
  • the previous article has been introduced in detail, and will not be repeated here.
  • the receiving end can calculate other items. For example, when the bandwidth of 50 MHz is reduced to 30 MHz, the switching step may be 2 MHz, and the number of switching times may be 10 times.
  • the first handover is performed, that is, when the symbol bandwidth is switched from 50MHz to 48MHz, the second period is 1/48us. It should also be understood that if the number of switching times is multiple times, the step of each switching may be different.
  • the switching information includes a variety of switching steps, the number of switching times each switching step corresponds to, and the order in which each switching step is adopted. For example, when the bandwidth of 50MHz is reduced to 30MHz, the switching step is set to 2MHz and 1MHz respectively, and the number of switching times corresponding to 2MHz is set to 5 times, the number of switching times corresponding to 1MHz is 10 times, and the switching sequence is first according to 2MHz Switch 5 times, and then switch 10 times according to 1MHz. Specifically, it can be adjusted according to actual application requirements, and the details will not be repeated here.
  • the switching information can be written into the first switching controller 201 when the sending terminal 20 is manufactured, and the switching information can also be imported into the first switching controller 201 through software when the user uses the sending terminal 20.
  • the controller 201 there is no specific limitation here. The specific form of the switching information in the actual application will be described in detail in the embodiments corresponding to FIG. 2D and FIG. 2E later, and the details will not be repeated here.
  • the first switching controller 201 is further configured to send first indication information to the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204, the first indication information is generated according to the foregoing switching information, and the first indication information is used to enable the symbol bandwidth
  • the enabling module 204 indicates the second period, so that the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 determines the first enabling signal according to the second period.
  • the handover information receiving module 202 is configured to receive service information from a source (not shown) and the handover information from the first handover controller 201, and use the service information and the handover information to configure the first frame.
  • the frame carries the aforementioned switching information and the aforementioned service information.
  • the switching information receiving module 202 is also configured to send the first frame to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, so that the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 uses the frequency corresponding to the first symbol bandwidth to output the first frame to the first frame.
  • a transceiver module 205 is configured to send the first frame to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, so that the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 uses the frequency corresponding to the first symbol bandwidth to output the first frame to the first frame.
  • the first transceiver module 205 is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to send the first frame to the receiving end. Since the switching information is carried in the first frame, the sending end can notify the receiving end in advance to switch the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information, and because the first frame also carries service information Therefore, the service information can be transmitted while notifying the receiving end of the switching information to ensure uninterrupted service transmission.
  • the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 is configured to determine the first enable signal according to the first indication information sent by the first switching controller 201, and send the first enable signal to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, the second An enable signal is used to enable the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 according to the second period carried in the first indication information.
  • the first enable signal may be a continuous pulse wave, and a pulse is generated every second period of time.
  • the symbol bandwidth The adaptation module 203 can output a symbol.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 can output consecutive symbols according to the second period.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 is configured to configure redundant information at the end of the aforementioned service information to obtain a second frame, and output the second frame under the enable action of the first enable signal. Because, the second frame in this embodiment is composed of multiple consecutive symbols. Therefore, when the pulse wave continues to act on the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, the second frame can be output according to the second cycle.
  • the first transceiver module 205 is configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module in the transmitting end can output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second symbol bandwidth under the enablement of the first enable signal, and carry redundant information and services.
  • the second frame of information is sent to the receiving end. Therefore, the sending end can not only adjust the bandwidth for sending the second frame to the second symbol bandwidth, but also ensure the continuity of the service when the second frame is sent using the second symbol bandwidth. get on.
  • the first transceiver module 205 is further configured to receive confirmation information from the receiving end, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information. Further, the confirmation information may be used to instruct the receiving end to obtain the handover information from the first frame.
  • the first transceiver module 205 is further configured to receive transmission signal quality information from the receiving end, where the transmission signal quality information is used to instruct the receiving end to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the signal quality of the second frame.
  • the sending end may determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information.
  • the transmission quality information may be mean square error (MSE) or signal-to-noise ratio (signal-to-noise ratio, SNR), which is not specifically limited here.
  • the first transceiver module 205 is further configured to send the transmission quality information to the first handover controller 201, so that the first handover controller 201 determines whether to continue to adjust the symbols according to the quality of the transmission quality information. bandwidth.
  • the sending end 20 may perform the operation of switching the symbol bandwidth again. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing content, and details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end 20 may decide whether to continue adjusting the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the second frame received by the receiving end. Therefore, the sending end 20 can enable the symbol bandwidth to gradually and smoothly switch while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
  • the main structure of the sending end 20 has been introduced above, and the specific structure of each module inside the sending end 20 will be further introduced in conjunction with the sending end 20 shown in FIG. 2A.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 is configured to adjust the transmission rate of each symbol in a frame, and configure redundant information at the end of the frame to ensure that the transmission time of the first frame and the transmission of the second frame are the same. More specifically, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may include a first-in-first-out module FIFO and a selector; or, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may include a random access memory RAM.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 includes a first-in first-out module FIFO 2031 and a selector 2032.
  • the FIFO refers to the sequential execution mode that first enters and executes first.
  • the FIFO 2031 is used to buffer the symbols that make up the first frame and input the first frame to the selector 2032, that is, the symbols in the first frame are input to the selector in the order of entering the FIFO 2031 2032. This allows the FIFO 2031 to leave a gap for the selector 2032 to complete rate adaptation and insert redundant symbols.
  • the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 is connected to the aforementioned selector 2032. Therefore, the first enable signal generated by the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 can directly act on the selector 2032.
  • the selector 2032 is configured to configure redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame under the enabling action of the first enable signal. Since the first enable signal is determined according to the second period, the selector 2032 can output a symbol every time interval corresponding to the second period under the enable action of the first enable signal, At this time, the frequency of the symbol output by the selector 2032 is the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the selector 2032 After the selector 2032 outputs the symbol carrying the service information, the selector 2032 will configure multiple redundant symbols at the end of the symbol carrying the service information, that is, at the end of the first frame. Symbol to fill up the extra time due to adjusting the output period of each symbol. It should be understood that the output time of each redundant symbol configured by the selector 2032 is also the duration corresponding to the second period. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1C, and details are not repeated here.
  • the selector in the symbol bandwidth adaptation module can output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second symbol bandwidth under the enablement of the first enable signal, and the second frame carries redundancy. Therefore, the sending end can adjust the bandwidth for sending the second frame to the second symbol bandwidth. Also, because the second frame output by the selector also carries service information, when the sending end transmits the second frame to the receiving end, the receiving end can not only adjust the bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth adjustment according to the switching information, but also The service information can also be obtained from the second frame to ensure the continuation of the service. Therefore, not only can the service not be interrupted, but also the symbol bandwidth of the service information transmitted between the sender and the receiver can be adjusted.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 includes a random access memory RAM 2033.
  • the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 is connected to the aforementioned RAM 2033. Therefore, the first enable signal generated by the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 can directly act on the RAM 2033.
  • the RAM 2033 is used to configure a symbol carrying redundant information at the end of a symbol carrying service information to obtain the second frame, and to output the second frame under the enable action of the first enable signal.
  • the RAM 2033 is enabled by the first enable information to output one symbol every time interval corresponding to a second period. At this time, the frequency of the output symbol of the RAM 2033 is the second symbol bandwidth. .
  • the RAM 2033 After the RAM 2033 has outputted the symbols carrying service information, since the RAM 2033 stores redundant symbols inside, the RAM 2033 will configure multiple redundant symbols at the end of the symbols carrying service information, which means that At the end of the symbol of the service information, a symbol carrying redundant information is configured to fill up the excess time due to the adjustment of the output period of each symbol. It should be understood that the output time of each redundant symbol configured by the RAM 2033 is also the duration corresponding to the second period. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1C, and details are not repeated here. It should also be understood that the RAM 2033 may also repeatedly read the symbols in the first frame as redundant symbols, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the RAM 2033 in the symbol bandwidth adaptation module can output the second frame at the frequency corresponding to the second symbol bandwidth under the enablement of the first enable signal, and the second frame carries redundancy. Therefore, the sending end can adjust the bandwidth for sending the second frame to the second symbol bandwidth. Also, because the second frame output by RAM 2033 also carries service information, when the sender is transmitting the second frame to the receiver, the receiver can not only adjust the symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth adjustment based on the switching information , The service information can also be obtained from the second frame to ensure the continuation of the service. Therefore, not only can the service not be interrupted, but also the symbol bandwidth of the service information transmitted between the sender and the receiver can be adjusted. In addition, since the RAM 2033 can configure the internally stored redundant symbols at the end of the symbols carrying service information, compared with the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2B, the internal structure of the symbol bandwidth adaptation module can be simplified.
  • the sending end 20 may be further as shown in FIG. 2D or FIG. 2E.
  • the handover information receiving module 202 may respectively use different modulation methods to modulate the handover information and the service information.
  • the handover information can be low-level modulation, which is beneficial for the receiving end to quickly adjust and extract the handover information;
  • the service information can be high-level modulation to ensure the demodulation accuracy of the service information, and reduce the failure of the demodulation of the service information. probability.
  • the handover information receiving module 202 in the sending end 20 includes a modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and a framing module 2022.
  • the framing module 2022 is connected to the first switching controller 201, so that the framing module 2022 can receive information sent by the first switching controller 201, for example, switching information.
  • the MAP module 2021 is configured to modulate the service information into the second modulation information by using the first modulation mode, so as to improve transmission efficiency, so that multiple bits of information can be transmitted within the time length of transmitting one symbol.
  • the first modulation method may be quadrature amplitude modulation QAM (for example, 64QAM or 256QAM) or other high-order modulation methods, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the framing module 2022 is configured to receive the switching information from the first switching controller 201, and use the second modulation method to modulate the switching information into third modulation information, so as to improve the transmission efficiency, so that the Multiple bits of information can be transmitted within the duration of one symbol.
  • the second modulation mode may be BPSK modulation or QPSK modulation, which is not specifically limited here. Since the switching information uses a low-order modulation method instead of a high-order modulation method, the modulation and demodulation of the low-order modulation method is easier than that of the high-order modulation method. Therefore, it is easier for the sending end to change the switching information. Inserting into the first frame also makes it easier for the receiving end to demodulate the switching information from the first frame.
  • the framing module 2022 is further configured to frame the second modulation information and the third modulation information to obtain the first frame, and send the first frame to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 can adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 2B or adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 2C, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the first frame may be as shown in FIG. 2D-1, and the first frame includes a frame header preamble, third modulation information, and second modulation information.
  • the third modulation information is a plurality of symbols obtained by low-order modulation of the switching information
  • the second modulation information is a plurality of symbols obtained by high-order modulation of the service information
  • the frame header preamble is used for Positioning in the frame. It should be noted that the number of symbols that make up the frame header preamble, the number of symbols that make up the third modulation information, and the number of symbols that make up the second modulation information can be adjusted according to specific application scenarios. limited.
  • the second frame obtained by configuring redundant information at the end of the symbol carrying service information by the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may be as shown in FIG. 2D-2.
  • the second frame includes the frame header preamble and the third frame. Modulation information, second modulation information, and redundant information. Wherein, the frame preamble, the third modulation information, and the second modulation information are similar to those in FIG. 2D-1, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the redundant information is a plurality of redundant symbols, and the number of redundant symbols varies due to the size of the switched symbol bandwidth, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the switching information receiving module 202 may use the same modulation method for the switching information and the service information.
  • both the aforementioned service information and the aforementioned switching information adopt high-level modulation. Compared with using two different modulation methods, it is beneficial to carry more bits of information in one frame and is beneficial to increase the amount of transmitted data per frame. In turn, it is beneficial to improve the transmission efficiency.
  • the switching information receiving module 202 includes a modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and a framing module 2022.
  • the MAP module 2021 is connected to the first switching controller 201, so that the MAP module 2021 can receive information sent by the first switching controller 201, for example, switching information.
  • the MAP module 2021 is configured to receive the switching information from the first switching controller 201, where the switching information has been described in detail in the foregoing, and the details will not be repeated here.
  • the MAP module 2021 is also used to modulate the switching information and the service information into first modulation information using the first modulation mode.
  • the MAP module 2021 can modulate the bits representing the switching information and the bits representing the service information into multiple symbols, so that fewer symbols are used to represent more bits, and more bits can be carried in one frame. More information in order to improve transmission efficiency.
  • the first modulation method may be quadrature amplitude modulation QAM (for example, 64QAM or 256QAM) or other high-order modulation methods, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the framing module 2022 is configured to frame the aforementioned first modulation information to obtain the first frame, and send the first frame to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 can adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 2B or adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 2C, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the first frame may be as shown in FIG. 2E-1, and the first frame includes byte header enable and first modulation information.
  • the first modulation information is a plurality of symbols obtained by high-order modulation of the switching information and service information.
  • the byte header enable is used for payload byte positioning, so that when the receiving end receives the first frame, it can know the specific position where the first modulation information is read. It should be noted that the number of symbols constituting the first modulation information can be adjusted according to specific application scenarios, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the second frame obtained by configuring the redundant information at the end of the first frame by the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may be as shown in FIG. 2E-2.
  • the second frame includes byte header enable, first modulation Information and redundant information.
  • the byte header enable and the first modulation information are similar to those in FIG. 2E-1, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the redundant information is a plurality of redundant symbols, and the number of redundant symbols varies due to the size of the switched symbol bandwidth, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the switching information receiving module 202 can receive the switching information and service information for further processing such as modulation. Make up the first frame. It is beneficial to load the switching information and the service information in the first frame accurately and efficiently, and reduce the error probability of the switching information and the service information received by the receiving end.
  • the specific implementation of the handover information receiving module 202 proposed in this embodiment can be combined with the implementation shown in FIG. 2C, that is, the modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and framing in this embodiment
  • the module 2022 can replace the switching information receiving module 202 in FIG. 2C. Specifically, it is similar to the implementation manner corresponding to the foregoing Fig. 2D and Fig. 2E, and details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end 20 may be further as shown in FIG. 2F.
  • the sending end 20 further includes a filtering device 206, and the filtering device 206 is used to adjust the waveform of the signal carrying the second frame.
  • the filtering device 206 may be a root raised cosine filter 2061 or a difference filter 2062, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the root raised cosine filter 2061 is used to shape the transmission spectrum, receive matched filtering, and reduce the inter-symbol crosstalk ISI.
  • the difference filter 2062 is used to complete the interpolation of the transmitted symbol frequency to the sampling frequency of a digital to analog converter (DAC) to isolate the image.
  • DAC digital to analog converter
  • the root raised cosine filter 2061 and the difference filter 2062 may be used as the filtering device 206. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2F, the information carrying the second frame may be filtered by the root raised cosine filter 2061, and then filtered by the difference filter 2062.
  • the internal structure of the transmitting end is similar to that of FIG. 2A, but there are some differences in the functions of the various modules therein.
  • the sending end 20 includes a first switching controller 201, a switching information receiving module 202, a symbol bandwidth adapting module 203, a symbol bandwidth enabling module 204, and a first transceiver module 205.
  • the first switching controller 201 is connected to the switching information receiving module 202 and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 respectively, and the symbol bandwidth adapting module 203 is connected to the switching information receiving module 202 and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 respectively.
  • the functions of the first switching controller 201, the switching information receiving module 202, and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 are similar to those of the aforementioned transmitting end when the symbol bandwidth is increased.
  • the switching information receiving module 202, and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 are similar to those of the aforementioned transmitting end when the symbol bandwidth is increased.
  • the first transceiver module 205 is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to send a first frame to the receiving end, and the first frame includes the number of symbols that carry the first information of the service.
  • the symbol bandwidth adapting module 203 is configured to output the second frame carrying the second information of the service according to the frequency corresponding to the second cycle under the enablement of the enable signal sent by the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204.
  • the number of symbols carrying the second information of the service in the second frame is less than the number of symbols carrying the first information of the service in the first frame.
  • the first transceiver module 205 is configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end.
  • the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Because, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted.
  • both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol.
  • the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 is used to adjust the transmission rate of each symbol in a frame. More specifically, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may include a first-in-first-out module FIFO and a selector; or, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may include a random access memory RAM.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 includes a first-in-first-out module FIFO and a selector, as shown in FIG. 2B, the FIFO 2031 is used to buffer the symbols that make up the first frame and input the first frame to the selection.
  • the device 2032 that is, the symbols in the first frame are input to the selector 2032 in the order in which they enter the FIFO 2031.
  • the selector 2032 outputs the symbol carrying the second information of the service according to the frequency corresponding to the second period of the second symbol bandwidth under the action of the second enable signal generated by the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204.
  • the related description in Figure 2B above which will not be repeated here.
  • the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 is connected to the aforementioned RAM 2033, and the second enable signal generated by the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 directly Act on the RAM 2033.
  • the RAM 2033 is used to output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second period of the second symbol bandwidth under the action of the second enable signal, that is, to output the symbol carrying the second information of the service.
  • the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 is connected to the aforementioned RAM 2033, and the second enable signal generated by the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 directly Act on the RAM 2033.
  • the RAM 2033 is used to output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second period of the second symbol bandwidth under the action of the second enable signal, that is, to output the symbol carrying the second information of the service.
  • the aforementioned switching information receiving module 202 may include a modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and a framing module 2022.
  • the function of the modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and the function of the framing module 2022 are similar to the functions in the previous embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2D and FIG. 2E, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end 20 further includes a filtering device 206, which is used to adjust the waveform of the signal carrying the second frame.
  • the filtering device 206 may be a root raised cosine filter 2061 or a difference filter 2062.
  • the functions in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2F are similar, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the structure of the sending end is introduced above, and the main structure of the receiving end is further introduced below:
  • the receiving end 30 includes a second switching controller 301, a symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, a switching information extraction module 303, and a second transceiver module 304.
  • the second switching controller 301 is connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 and the switching information extraction module 303 respectively, and the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 is connected to the switching information extraction module 303.
  • the second transceiver module 304 is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to receive a first frame from the sending end, the first frame carries switching information and service information, and the switching information is used to instruct to switch the first symbol bandwidth to The second symbol bandwidth, the switching information includes a second period, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information includes a second period, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information extraction module 303 is configured to extract the switching information from the first frame and send the switching information to the second switching controller 301.
  • the second switching controller 301 is configured to determine second indication information according to the switching information, and send the second indication information to the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, where the second indication information is used to indicate the second period.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 is configured to adjust the period to the second period according to the second indication information.
  • the second transceiver module 304 is further configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive a second frame from the transmitting end, where the second frame carries the switching information, the service information, and redundancy information;
  • the handover information extraction module 303 is also used to extract the service information from the second frame, so that the second transceiver module 304 sends the service information to the sink (not shown).
  • the receiving end can receive the first frame through the second transceiving module 304, and obtain the switching information from the first frame through the switching information extraction module 303 to adjust the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth Therefore, the receiving end can prepare for receiving the frame structure subsequently sent by the sending end using the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the sending end sends the second frame to the receiving end
  • the receiving end can not only directly use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame, but also obtain the service information from the second frame to ensure the continuity of the service. get on. Therefore, the synchronization of the transmission information between the sender and the receiver can be guaranteed.
  • the second switching controller 301 is further configured to instruct the second transceiver module 304 to send confirmation information to the sending end, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end 30 has received the switching information. Further, the confirmation information may be used to instruct the receiving end to obtain the handover information from the first frame.
  • the second switching controller 301 is further configured to instruct the second transceiver module 304 to send transmission quality information to the sending end, and the transmission quality information is used to instruct the receiving end 30 to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the The quality of the second frame, so that the sender determines whether it needs to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information.
  • the transmission quality information may be mean square error MSE or signal-to-noise ratio SNR.
  • the receiving end 30 will also perform the operation of adjusting the symbol bandwidth. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing content, and details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end can decide whether to continue adjusting the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the second frame received by the receiving end 30. Therefore, when the sending end determines that it is necessary to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth, the receiving end 30 cooperates with the sending end to adjust the symbol bandwidth and extract the service information in the third frame structure and the service information in the fourth frame structure. , The symbol bandwidth can be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the instability of the symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
  • the main structure of the receiving terminal 30 has been introduced above, and the specific structure of each module inside the receiving terminal 30 will be further introduced in conjunction with the receiving terminal 30 shown in FIG. 3A.
  • the switching signal extraction module 303 includes a demodulation and mapping module 3032 and a deframing module 3031.
  • the deframing module 3031 is connected to the second switching controller 301, so that the deframing module 3031 can send information, for example, switching information, to the second switching controller 301.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization ring 302 is connected to the deframing module 3031, so that the deframing module 3031 can receive the information sent by the symbol bandwidth synchronization ring 302, for example, the first frame or the second frame.
  • the deframing module 3031 when the deframing module 3031 receives the first frame sent by the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, the deframing module 3031 is configured to deframe the first frame to obtain the third modulation information and the second modulation information.
  • the second modulation information is modulated by the service information through the first modulation method, so that the information transmission process can improve the transmission efficiency, and multiple bits of information can be transmitted within the duration of transmitting one symbol.
  • the first modulation method may be quadrature amplitude modulation QAM (for example, 64QAM or 256QAM) or other high-order modulation methods, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the third modulation information is modulated by switching information through a second modulation method, and the second modulation method may be BPSK modulation or QPSK modulation, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the deframing module 3031 is also used to demodulate the third modulation information into the switching information using a second demodulation method, and send the switching information to the second switching controller 301, so that the second switching The controller 301 can control the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the switching information.
  • the DeMAP module 3032 is used to demodulate the second modulation information using the first demodulation method to obtain the service information.
  • the switching information receiving module 202 in the aforementioned sending end 20 adopts the implementation as shown in FIG. 2D, that is, the framing module 2022 in the switching information receiving module 202 and the first switching controller 201 When connecting, the receiving end 30 should adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the switching signal extraction module 303 includes a demodulation and mapping module 3032 and a deframing module 3031.
  • the DeMAP module 3032 is connected to the second switching controller 301, so that the DeMAP module 3032 can send information to the second switching controller 301, for example, switching information.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization ring 302 is connected to the deframing module 3031, so that the deframing module 3031 can receive the information sent by the symbol bandwidth synchronization ring 302, for example, the first frame or the second frame.
  • the deframing module 3031 when the deframing module 3031 receives the first frame sent by the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, the deframing module 3031 is configured to deframe the first frame to obtain the first modulation information.
  • the first modulation information is obtained by adjusting the switching information and the service information through the first modulation mode. Therefore, the DeMAP module 3032 is used to demodulate the first modulation information using the first demodulation method to obtain the switching information and service information.
  • the DeMAP module 3032 is also used to send the switching information to the second switching controller 301.
  • the first modulation method may be quadrature amplitude modulation QAM (for example, 64QAM or 256QAM) or other high-order modulation methods, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the switching information receiving module 202 in the aforementioned sending end 20 adopts the implementation as shown in FIG. 2E, that is, the MAP module 2021 in the switching information receiving module 202 is connected to the first switching controller 201 At this time, the receiving end 30 should adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 3C.
  • the switching information extraction module 303 extracts switching information and service information from the frame structure sent by the sending end. Adopting the foregoing modulation methods is beneficial to accurately and efficiently load the switching information and the service information in the first frame or the second frame, so as to reduce the error probability of the switching information and the service information received by the receiving end.
  • the receiving end 30 may be further shown in FIG. 3D.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 in the receiving end 30 includes a symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 and a filtering device.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 is configured to adjust the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 is also used to compensate the frequency deviation of the transceiver.
  • the filtering device is used to adjust the waveform of the signal carrying the frame structure to be received, so that the phase of the signal output by the filtering device is adjusted according to the period corresponding to the switched symbol bandwidth.
  • the frame structure to be received may include the foregoing first frame or the foregoing second frame, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the filtering device may be a root raised cosine filter 3021 or a difference filter 3022, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the root raised cosine filter 3021 is used for receiving matched filtering to reduce ISI of inter-symbol interference.
  • the difference filter 3021 is used to complete the decimation from the DAC sampling frequency to the optimal receiving sampling point to avoid aliasing.
  • the root raised cosine filter 3021 and the difference filter 3022 can be used in combination as a filtering device.
  • the aforementioned symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 may be a symbol bandwidth closed loop synchronization loop or a symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop.
  • the aforementioned symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 shown in FIG. 3D is a symbol bandwidth closed loop synchronization loop.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 includes a symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023, a difference filter 3021, and a root raised cosine filter 3022.
  • the difference filter 3021 is connected to the root raised cosine filter 3022
  • the root raised cosine filter 3022 is connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 is connected to the difference filter 3021. Therefore, a closed loop is formed from the difference filter 3021, to the root raised cosine filter 3022, and then to the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 when the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 is a symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop, the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 includes a symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023, a difference filter 3021, and a root raised cosine filter 3022 .
  • the difference filter 3021 is connected to the root raised cosine filter 3022.
  • the root raised cosine filter 3022 is not connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023, but is directly connected to the deframing module 3031, and then the deframing module 3031 is connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 and the aforementioned difference filter 3021 form a bidirectional connection.
  • the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 proposed in this embodiment may adopt the symbol bandwidth closed loop synchronization loop shown in FIG. 3D, or the symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop shown in FIG. 3E. Make a limit.
  • the symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop is adopted, the specific implementation of the symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop can be combined with the implementation manner proposed in FIG. 3C, and the details will not be repeated here.
  • the internal structure of the symbol bandwidth closed-loop synchronization loop may be different from the internal structure of the symbol bandwidth closed-loop synchronization loop shown in Figure 3D, and the symbol bandwidth is open loop.
  • the internal structure of the synchronization loop may be different from the internal structure of the symbol bandwidth open-loop synchronization loop shown in FIG. 3E, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the internal structure of the receiving end is similar to the aforementioned FIG. 3A,
  • the receiving end 30 includes a second switching controller 301, a symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, a switching information extraction module 303, and a second transceiver module 304.
  • the second switching controller 301 is connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 and the switching information extraction module 303 respectively, and the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 is connected to the switching information extraction module 303.
  • the functions of the aforementioned modules are similar to those of the receiving end performing the function of increasing the symbol bandwidth in the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the switching signal extraction module 303 includes a demodulation and mapping DeMAP module 3032 and a deframing module 3031.
  • the function of the DeMAP module 3032 and the function of the deframing module 3031 are similar to the functions in the previous embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3B and FIG. 3C, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the receiving end 30 also includes a symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, which is used to adjust the frequency control word using switching information to supplement the frequency offset and phase offset between the receiving end and the transmitting end.
  • a symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 which is used to adjust the frequency control word using switching information to supplement the frequency offset and phase offset between the receiving end and the transmitting end.
  • the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
  • the sending end and the receiving end involved in the embodiment of this application are described in detail above, and the specific process of the bandwidth switching method involved in the embodiment of this application will be introduced below.
  • the steps performed by the sending end and the receiving end in the bandwidth switching method include:
  • the sending end determines the first frame according to the switching information and the service information.
  • the sending end transmitting service data to the receiving end, that is, during the process of sending service information from the sending end to the receiving end, if the sending end needs to adjust the symbol bandwidth, the sending end needs to control Each module inside the transmitting end adjusts the symbol bandwidth, and notifies the receiving end of the parameters required to adjust the symbol bandwidth.
  • the sending end may determine switching information, where the switching information is used to instruct to switch the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. More specifically, the switching information includes parameters required by the transmitting end to adjust the symbol bandwidth. The switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step.
  • the details are similar to the foregoing Table 1, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step.
  • the switching information may be a second period, the second period corresponding to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information may include the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
  • the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end obtains the first frame by modulating and framing the service information obtained from the source and the aforementioned switching information.
  • modulation and framing processing reference may be made to the related descriptions in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2D and the foregoing FIG. 2E, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the first frame to the receiving end.
  • the sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the first frame to the receiving end, so the receiving end may use the first symbol bandwidth to receive the first frame from the sending end.
  • the first frame carries the aforementioned switching information and the aforementioned service information.
  • the sending end can notify the receiving end to receive the switching information by sending the first frame to the receiving end, so that the receiving end is receiving the first frame.
  • Step 403 is executed one frame later.
  • the receiving end obtains the switching information and the service information from the first frame.
  • the receiving end will demodulate and deframe the first frame to obtain the switching information and the service information carried in the first frame.
  • demodulation and deframing processing reference may be made to the related description in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3B or the foregoing FIG. 3C, and details are not repeated here.
  • the receiving end sends confirmation information to the sending end.
  • step 404 is an optional step.
  • the receiving end may send confirmation information to the sending end to indicate to the sending end that the receiving end has successfully obtained the switching information.
  • the receiving end switches the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information.
  • step 404 and step 405 have no clear time sequence limitation, and step 404 and step 405 only need to be performed after step 403 described above.
  • the receiving end will adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the switching information, specifically, adjust the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the receiving end may also send the service information to the sink to ensure continuous transmission of the service information to avoid service interruption.
  • the sending end determines a second frame according to the switching information, the service information, and the redundancy information, and the redundancy information is located at the end of the second frame.
  • step 404 when step 404 is not performed, the sender can perform step 406 after performing step 402 after waiting for a certain period of time, that is, there is no clear time sequence between step 406 and the aforementioned steps 403 and 405. It only needs to be executed after step 402.
  • the operation of the sending end to wait for a certain period of time may be implemented in the manner of a timer, and the specific duration of the timer may be configured according to actual requirements, which is not specifically limited here.
  • step 406 when step 404 is performed, step 406 will be performed after step 404, and there is no clear time sequence limitation between step 406 and the aforementioned step 405.
  • the sending end because the sending end has instructed the receiving end to adjust the symbol bandwidth through the switching information carried in the first frame in the foregoing steps. Therefore, the sending end can use the second symbol bandwidth to transmit service information. Specifically, the sending end may determine the second frame according to the switching information, the service information, and the redundancy information, and transmit the service information to the receiving end by sending the second frame to the receiving end.
  • the sending end determining the second frame reference may be made to the related description in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2B or the foregoing FIG. 2C, and details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end.
  • the sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end
  • the receiving end since the receiving end has adjusted the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information in the foregoing steps, Therefore, the receiving end may use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame from the sending end.
  • the receiving end obtains the service information from the second frame.
  • the second frame carries the service information and redundant information.
  • the receiving end since the receiving end has adjusted the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth in the foregoing steps, the receiving end can obtain the service information from the second frame and discard the second frame Redundant information in.
  • the receiving end sends transmission quality information to the sending end.
  • step 409 is an optional step.
  • the transmission signal quality information is used to instruct the receiving end to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the signal quality of the second frame.
  • the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. For example, the sending end may determine to continue to use the second symbol bandwidth to transmit service information, and the sending end may also determine to loop the foregoing steps 401 to 408 to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth.
  • the transmission quality information may be the mean square error MSE or the signal-to-noise ratio SNR, which is similar to the foregoing and will not be repeated here.
  • the receiver since the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries switching information and service information, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but the receiver can also be The terminal obtains the service information from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service.
  • the symbol bandwidth adaptation module in the transmitting end can output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second symbol bandwidth under the enablement of the first enable signal, and transfer the second frame that carries redundant information and service information.
  • the frame is sent to the receiving end. Therefore, the sending end can not only adjust the bandwidth for sending the second frame to the second symbol bandwidth, but also ensure the continuation of the service when using the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame.
  • the steps performed by the transmitting end and the receiving end in the bandwidth switching method include:
  • the sending end determines the first frame according to the switching information and the first information of the service.
  • the sending end may determine switching information, where the switching information is used to instruct to switch the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. More specifically, the switching information includes parameters required by the transmitting end to adjust the symbol bandwidth. The switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
  • the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step.
  • the details are similar to the foregoing Table 1, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step.
  • the switching information may be a second period, the second period corresponding to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the handover information may include the number of symbols carrying the second information of the service.
  • the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end obtains the first frame by modulating and framing the service information obtained from the source and the aforementioned switching information.
  • modulation and framing processing reference may be made to the related descriptions in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2D and the foregoing FIG. 2E, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the first frame to the receiving end.
  • the first frame carries the aforementioned switching information and the aforementioned first information of the service.
  • the sending end can notify the receiving end to receive the switching information by sending the first frame to the receiving end, so that the receiving end is receiving the first frame.
  • Step 503 is executed one frame later.
  • the receiving end obtains the switching information and the first information of the service from the first frame.
  • the receiving end will demodulate and deframe the first frame to obtain the switching information and the first information carried in the first frame.
  • demodulation and deframing processing reference may be made to the related description in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3B or the foregoing FIG. 3C, and details are not repeated here.
  • the receiving end sends confirmation information to the sending end.
  • step 504 is an optional step.
  • Step 504 is similar to the aforementioned step 404, and the details will not be repeated here.
  • the receiving end switches the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information.
  • step 504 and step 505 have no clear time sequence limitation, and step 504 and step 505 only need to be performed after step 503 described above.
  • the receiving end will adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the switching information, specifically, adjust the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth.
  • the receiving end may also send the service information to the sink to ensure continuous transmission of the service information to avoid service interruption.
  • the sending end determines the second frame according to the second information of the service.
  • step 504 when step 504 is not performed, the sending end can perform step 506 after performing step 502 after waiting for a certain period of time, that is, there is no clear time sequence between step 506 and the aforementioned steps 503 and step 505. It only needs to be executed after step 502.
  • the operation of the sending end to wait for a certain period of time may be implemented in the manner of a timer, and the specific duration of the timer may be configured according to actual requirements, which is not specifically limited here.
  • step 506 when step 504 is performed, step 506 will be performed after step 504, and there is no clear time sequence limitation between step 506 and the aforementioned step 505.
  • the sending end because the sending end has instructed the receiving end to adjust the symbol bandwidth through the switching information carried in the first frame in the foregoing steps. Therefore, the sending end can use the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the second information of the service. Specifically, the sending end may determine the second frame according to the second information of the service, and transmit the second information of the service to the receiving end by sending the second frame to the receiving end.
  • the sending end determining the second frame reference may be made to the related description in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2B or the foregoing FIG. 2C, and details are not repeated here.
  • the sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end.
  • the second frame contains the second information of the aforementioned service.
  • the receiving end obtains second information of the service from the second frame.
  • the receiving end since the receiving end has adjusted the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth in the foregoing steps, the receiving end can obtain the second information of the service from the second frame.
  • the receiving end sends transmission quality information to the sending end.
  • step 509 is an optional step.
  • Step 509 is similar to the aforementioned step 409, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries the switching information and the first information of the service, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but also The receiving end is made to obtain the first information of the service from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service.
  • the second frame sent by the sending end to the receiving end carries the second information of the service, and the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the same service. Therefore, when the second symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the second frame, the continuous operation of the service is ensured.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are a sending end, a receiving end, and a bandwidth switching method. The sending end, the receiving end, and the bandwidth switching method are applied to continuous transmission scenarios, such as optical fiber transmission, broadband access in a cable manner of a cable television, and microwave communication. The bandwidth switching method comprises: the sending end sending a first frame carrying switching information and service information to the receiving end; and the receiving end acquiring the switching information and the service information from the first frame, and adjusting symbol bandwidth by using the switching information, such that the receiving end can receive the second frame, carrying the service information, sent by the sending end. Therefore, the symbol bandwidth for transmitting the service information between the sending end and the receiving end can be adjusted without interrupting service.

Description

一种发送端、接收端以及带宽切换方法Sending end, receiving end and bandwidth switching method
本申请要求于2019年10月18日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910995743.X、发明名称为“一种发送端、接收端以及带宽切换方法”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on October 18, 2019, the application number is 201910995743.X, and the invention title is "a sender, receiver, and bandwidth switching method", all of which are approved The reference is incorporated in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,尤其涉及一种发送端、接收端以及带宽切换方法。The embodiments of the present application relate to the communication field, and in particular, to a sending end, a receiving end, and a bandwidth switching method.
背景技术Background technique
在通信系统中,传输容量(throughput)指单位时间内传输净荷比特的个数。一般地,传输容量越大,则单位时间内传输的数据越多。因此,越大的传输容量,越容易满足用户的数据传输需求。由于,在调制模式和码率不变的情况下,该传输容量的大小与符号带宽的大小呈正相关。因此,可以通过调整符号带宽以调整传输容量。In a communication system, throughput refers to the number of payload bits transmitted per unit time. Generally, the larger the transmission capacity, the more data is transmitted per unit time. Therefore, the larger the transmission capacity, the easier it is to meet the user's data transmission needs. Because, under the condition that the modulation mode and code rate remain unchanged, the size of the transmission capacity is positively correlated with the size of the symbol bandwidth. Therefore, the symbol bandwidth can be adjusted to adjust the transmission capacity.
在现有的调整符号带宽的方案中,若需要将发送端和接收端之间的符号带宽从第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽,则该发送端将先中断采用第一符号带宽传输的业务,然后在该发送端和接收端之间建立采用第二符号带宽的传输。在新的传输建立之后,该发送端在使用该第二符号带宽向该接收端传输业务。In the existing solution for adjusting the symbol bandwidth, if the symbol bandwidth between the sending end and the receiving end needs to be switched from the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth, the sending end will first interrupt the transmission using the first symbol bandwidth. Service, and then establish a transmission using the second symbol bandwidth between the sending end and the receiving end. After the new transmission is established, the sending end is using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service to the receiving end.
在这样的方案中,将导致该发送端与该接收端之间的业务传输中断,进而增加数据报文延时。In such a solution, the service transmission between the sending end and the receiving end will be interrupted, thereby increasing the data message delay.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种发送端、接收端以及带宽切换方法,用于保证业务不中断的情况下调整发送端和接收端之间传输业务信息的符号带宽。The embodiments of the present application provide a sending end, a receiving end, and a bandwidth switching method, which are used to adjust the symbol bandwidth for transmitting service information between the sending end and the receiving end without interrupting services.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种发送端,该发送端包括如下部分:接收模块和发送模块。其中,接收模块,用于接收业务信息。发送模块,用于采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送该业务信息,该业务信息位于第一帧中。此外,该发送模块,还用于采用该第二符号带宽向该接收端发送该业务信息和冗余信息,该业务信息和该冗余信息位于第二帧中。其中,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。In the first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a sending end, and the sending end includes the following parts: a receiving module and a sending module. Among them, the receiving module is used to receive business information. The sending module is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to send the service information to the receiving end, and the service information is located in the first frame. In addition, the sending module is further configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the service information and redundant information to the receiving end, where the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame. Wherein, the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
本申请实施例中,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。又由于,该第一帧仅携带了业务信息,该第二帧除了携带该业务信息之外,还携带了冗余信息。因此,该发送端需要在传输第一帧的时间内传输更多的信息,因此,可以确定该发送端传输该第一帧的速率小于该发送端传输该第二帧的速率。由于,该发送端在传输的第一帧和第二帧中均携带了业务信息,该业务信息为同一业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一 直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In the embodiment of the present application, the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information. Also, because the first frame only carries service information, the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
根据第一方面,本申请实施例第一方面的第一种实施方式中,该第一帧还包括切换信息,该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。According to the first aspect, in the first implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
本实施方式中,由于发送端发给接收端的第一帧除了携带了业务信息还携带了切换信息,因此,不仅可以在该发送端切换符号带宽之前就通知接收端调整符号带宽,还可以使该接收端从该第一帧中获取业务信息以保证业务的持续进行。In this embodiment, since the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries switching information in addition to the service information, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but also the The receiving end obtains the service information from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service.
根据第一方面的第一种实施方式,本申请实施例第一方面的第二种实施方式中,该切换信息包括如下任意一项:该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;或者,该切换步进;或者,第二周期,该第二周期与一个该切换步进对应,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;或者,携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数。According to the first implementation manner of the first aspect, in the second implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used for Indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second cycle, the second cycle corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second cycle is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, The number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
本实施方式中,当该切换信息为该切换步进的标识时,该切换步进的标识与该切换步进一一对应。因此,当该发送端将该切换步进的标识发送至该接收端时,该接收端可以通过查找该标识与切换步进对应关系表获知该切换步进。在这样的实现方式中,由于,发送切换步进的标识数据量仅为1比特或2比特,因此,该切换信息仅占用第一帧中的较小部分的传输资源,有利于该第一帧携带更多的业务信息。In this embodiment, when the switching information is the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step corresponds to the switching step in a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification and the switching step. In such an implementation manner, since the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits, the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame. Carry more business information.
当该切换信息为该切换步进时,该接收端可以直接根据该发送端发送的切换步进确定符号带宽需要调整的量。因此,相比于前一种实现方式,该接收端无需执行查表的操作,可以直接获知切换步进,有利于减少该接收端的计算量,减轻接收端的计算负荷。When the switching information is the switching step, the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
当该切换信息为第二周期时,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长,该第二周期的倒数为该第二符号带宽。又由于,该第一符号带宽的大小对于该接收端是已知的,因此,该接收端可以计算出该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值,即该切换步进。因此,该第二周期与该切换步进存在对应关系。本实现方式相对于前述实现方式增加了表示切换步进的方式,可以使该发送端发送给该接收端的切换信息灵活多样。When the switching information is the second period, the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth, and the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth. Also, since the size of the first symbol bandwidth is known to the receiving end, the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step. Compared with the foregoing implementation, this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
当该切换信息包括携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数时,由于,传输一个帧所需要的时间对于发送端和接收端均为已知的,当确定了这一个帧中传输的符号的个数,则可以计算出传输每一个符号的时长,即前述第二周期。由于,前述第二周期与前述切换步进是存在对应关系的。因此,该发送端可以通过向该接收端指示携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数以告知该接收端切换步进。此外,虽然该接收端已知第一帧中包含的携带业务信息的符号的个数,但该第二帧中包含冗余信息,当该接收端获知该携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数之后,该接收端可以更加准确地解调携带业务信息的符号,并且丢弃携带冗余的符号。有利于避免该接收端将携带业务信息的符号丢弃而造成数据传输缺失。When the handover information includes the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information, since the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when this frame is determined The number of symbols transmitted in, the time length of transmitting each symbol can be calculated, that is, the aforementioned second period. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end. In addition, although the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information. When the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
根据第一方面的第二种实施方式,本申请实施例第一方面的第三种实施方式中,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。According to the second implementation manner of the first aspect, in the third implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. frequency.
本实施方式中,该接收端可以获知在该第二帧之后的若干帧是否也需要切换符号带宽, 有利于该接收端为后续的切换操作做准备。In this embodiment, the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame, which is beneficial to the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent switching operation.
根据第一方面、第一方面的第一种实施方式至第一方面的第三种实施方式中的任意一种实施方式,本申请实施例第一方面的第四种实施方式中,该发送端还包括处理模块;该处理模块,用于在该业务信息的末尾配置该冗余信息得到该第二帧。According to any one of the first aspect, the first implementation manner of the first aspect to the third implementation manner of the first aspect, in the fourth implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the sending end It also includes a processing module; the processing module is used to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame.
根据第一方面的第四种实施方式,本申请实施例第一方面的第五种实施方式中,该处理模块包括先入先出模块FIFO和选择器。其中,该FIFO,用于缓存该业务信息,并将该业务信息输入至该选择器;该选择器,用于在该业务信息的末尾配置该冗余信息得到该第二帧,并按照该第二周期对应的频率输出该第二帧。According to the fourth implementation manner of the first aspect, in the fifth implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the processing module includes a first-in first-out module FIFO and a selector. Wherein, the FIFO is used to buffer the service information and input the service information to the selector; the selector is used to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame, and follow the first The second frame is output at the frequency corresponding to the two cycles.
根据第一方面的第四种实施方式,本申请实施例第一方面的第六种实施方式中,该处理模块包括随机存取存储器RAM,该RAM用于缓存该业务信息,在该业务信息的末尾配置该冗余信息得到该第二帧,并按照该第二周期对应的频率输出该第二帧。According to the fourth implementation manner of the first aspect, in the sixth implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the processing module includes a random access memory RAM, and the RAM is used to cache the business information. At the end, the redundant information is configured to obtain the second frame, and the second frame is output according to the frequency corresponding to the second period.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种接收端,该接收端包括如下部分:接收模块,用于采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务信息,该业务信息位于第一帧中。此外,该接收模块,还用于采用第二符号带宽从该发送端接收该业务信息和冗余信息,该业务信息和该冗余信息位于第二帧中,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a receiving end, which includes the following parts: a receiving module, configured to receive service information from the sending end using a first symbol bandwidth, the service information being located in a first frame. In addition, the receiving module is also configured to receive the service information and redundant information from the sending end using the second symbol bandwidth, the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame, and the first symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the service The duration of the information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
本申请实施例中,由于,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。又由于,该第一帧仅携带了业务信息,该第二帧除了携带该业务信息之外,还携带了冗余信息。因此,该发送端需要在传输第一帧的时间内传输更多的信息,因此,可以确定该发送端传输该第一帧的速率小于该发送端传输该第二帧的速率。由于,该发送端在传输的第一帧和第二帧中均携带了业务信息,该业务信息为同一业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In the embodiment of the present application, because the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information. Also, because the first frame only carries service information, the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
根据第二方面,本申请实施例第二方面的第一种实施方式中,该第一帧还包括切换信息,该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。According to the second aspect, in the first implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
本实施方式中,由于发送端发给接收端的第一帧除了携带了业务信息还携带了切换信息,因此,不仅可以在该发送端切换符号带宽之前就通知接收端调整符号带宽,还可以使该接收端从该第一帧中获取业务信息以保证业务的持续进行。In this embodiment, since the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries switching information in addition to the service information, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but also the The receiving end obtains the service information from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service.
根据第二方面的第一种实施方式,本申请实施例第二方面的第二种实施方式中,该切换信息包括如下任意一项:该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;或者,该切换步进;或者,第二周期,该第二周期与一个该切换步进对应,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;或者,携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数。According to the first implementation manner of the second aspect, in the second implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used for Indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second cycle, the second cycle corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second cycle is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, The number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
本实施方式中,当该切换信息为该切换步进的标识时,该切换步进的标识与该切换步进一一对应。因此,当该发送端将该切换步进的标识发送至该接收端时,该接收端可以通 过查找该标识与切换步进对应关系表获知该切换步进。在这样的实现方式中,由于,发送切换步进的标识数据量仅为1比特或2比特,因此,该切换信息仅占用第一帧中的较小部分的传输资源,有利于该第一帧携带更多的业务信息。In this embodiment, when the switching information is the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step corresponds to the switching step in a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification and the switching step. In such an implementation manner, since the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits, the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame. Carry more business information.
当该切换信息为该切换步进时,该接收端可以直接根据该发送端发送的切换步进确定符号带宽需要调整的量。因此,相比于前一种实现方式,该接收端无需执行查表的操作,可以直接获知切换步进,有利于减少该接收端的计算量,减轻接收端的计算负荷。When the switching information is the switching step, the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
当该切换信息为第二周期时,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长,该第二周期的倒数为该第二符号带宽。又由于,该第一符号带宽的大小对于该接收端是已知的,因此,该接收端可以计算出该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值,即该切换步进。因此,该第二周期与该切换步进存在对应关系。本实现方式相对于前述实现方式增加了表示切换步进的方式,可以使该发送端发送给该接收端的切换信息灵活多样。When the switching information is the second period, the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth, and the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth. Also, since the size of the first symbol bandwidth is known to the receiving end, the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step. Compared with the foregoing implementation, this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
当该切换信息包括携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数时,由于,传输一个帧所需要的时间对于发送端和接收端均为已知的,当确定了这一个帧中传输的符号的个数,则可以计算出传输每一个符号的时长,即前述第二周期。由于,前述第二周期与前述切换步进是存在对应关系的。因此,该发送端可以通过向该接收端指示携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数以告知该接收端切换步进。此外,虽然该接收端已知第一帧中包含的携带业务信息的符号的个数,但该第二帧中包含冗余信息,当该接收端获知该携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数之后,该接收端可以更加准确地解调携带业务信息的符号,并且丢弃携带冗余的符号。有利于避免该接收端将携带业务信息的符号丢弃而造成数据传输缺失。When the handover information includes the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information, since the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when this frame is determined The number of symbols transmitted in, the time length of transmitting each symbol can be calculated, that is, the aforementioned second period. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end. In addition, although the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information. When the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
根据第二方面的第二种实施方式,本申请实施例第二方面的第三种实施方式中,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。According to the second implementation manner of the second aspect, in the third implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. frequency.
本实施方式中,该接收端可以获知在该第二帧之后的若干帧是否也需要切换符号带宽,有利于该接收端为后续的切换操作做准备。In this embodiment, the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame, which is beneficial for the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent switching operation.
根据第二方面、第二方面的第一种实施方式至第二方面的第三种实施方式中的任意一种实施方式,本申请实施例第二方面的第四种实施方式中,该接收端包括处理模块;该处理模块,用于从该第一帧提取该切换信息;该处理模块,还用于根据该切换步进调整采样频率,该采样频率的倒数为该第二周期。According to the second aspect, the first implementation manner of the second aspect to the third implementation manner of the second aspect, in the fourth implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the receiving end It includes a processing module; the processing module is used to extract the switching information from the first frame; the processing module is also used to adjust the sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period.
本实施方式中,该处理模块有利于补偿收发频偏,提高符号带宽切换的效率。In this embodiment, the processing module is beneficial to compensate for the frequency deviation of the transceiver and improve the efficiency of symbol bandwidth switching.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种发送端,该发送端包括如下部分:接收模块,用于接收业务的第一信息和该业务的第二信息。发送模块,用于采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送该第一信息,该第一信息位于第一帧中。此外,该发送模块,还用于采用第二符号带宽向该接收端发送该第二信息,该第二信息位于第二帧中,采用第一符号带宽传输该第一信息的时长与采用第二符号带宽传输该第二信息的时长相同,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a sending end, and the sending end includes the following parts: a receiving module configured to receive first information of a service and second information of the service. The sending module is configured to send the first information to the receiving end using the first symbol bandwidth, and the first information is located in the first frame. In addition, the sending module is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the second information to the receiving end. The second information is located in the second frame. The symbol bandwidth has the same duration for transmitting the second information, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame.
本实施例中,采用第一符号带宽传输该第一信息的时长与采用第二符号带宽传输该第二信息的时长相同。该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息 的符号数。由于,在相同的时间中,该第一帧与该第二帧分别传输了不同的数量的符号。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率与传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率不同。由于,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率大于传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率。由于,该第一帧与该第二帧中均携带了业务信息,即前述第一信息和前述第二信息均为该业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In this embodiment, the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth. The number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Because, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
根据第三方面,本申请实施例第三方面的第一种实施方式中,该第一帧还包括切换信息,该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。According to the third aspect, in the first implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
本实施方式中,由于发送端发给接收端的第一帧除了携带了业务的第一信息还携带了切换信息,因此,不仅可以在该发送端切换符号带宽之前就通知接收端调整符号带宽,还可以使该接收端从该第一帧中获取该第一信息以保证业务的持续进行。In this embodiment, since the first frame sent by the sending end to the receiving end carries switching information in addition to the first information of the service, not only can the receiving end be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth, but also The receiving end may obtain the first information from the first frame to ensure the continuous operation of the service.
根据第三方面的第一种实施方式,本申请实施例第三方面的第二种实施方式中,该切换信息包括如下任意一项:该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;或者,该切换步进;或者,第二周期,该第二周期与一个该切换步进对应,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;或者,携带该第二信息的符号数。According to the first implementation manner of the third aspect, in the second implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used for Indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second cycle, the second cycle corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second cycle is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, The number of symbols carrying the second information.
本实施方式中,当该切换信息为该切换步进的标识时,该切换步进的标识与该切换步进一一对应。因此,当该发送端将该切换步进的标识发送至该接收端时,该接收端可以通过查找该标识与切换步进对应关系表获知该切换步进。在这样的实现方式中,由于,发送切换步进的标识数据量仅为1比特或2比特,因此,该切换信息仅占用第一帧中的较小部分的传输资源,有利于该第一帧携带更多的业务信息。In this embodiment, when the switching information is the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step corresponds to the switching step in a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification and the switching step. In such an implementation manner, since the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits, the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame. Carry more business information.
当该切换信息为该切换步进时,该接收端可以直接根据该发送端发送的切换步进确定符号带宽需要调整的量。因此,相比于前一种实现方式,该接收端无需执行查表的操作,可以直接获知切换步进,有利于减少该接收端的计算量,减轻接收端的计算负荷。When the switching information is the switching step, the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
当该切换信息为第二周期时,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长,该第二周期的倒数为该第二符号带宽。又由于,该第一符号带宽的大小对于该接收端是已知的,因此,该接收端可以计算出该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值,即该切换步进。因此,该第二周期与该切换步进存在对应关系。本实现方式相对于前述实现方式增加了表示切换步进的方式,可以使该发送端发送给该接收端的切换信息灵活多样。When the switching information is the second period, the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth, and the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth. Also, since the size of the first symbol bandwidth is known to the receiving end, the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step. Compared with the foregoing implementation, this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
当该切换信息包括携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数时,由于,传输一个帧所需要的时间对于发送端和接收端均为已知的,当确定了这一个帧中传输的符号的个数,则可以计算出传输每一个符号的时长,即前述第二周期。由于,前述第二周期与前述切换步进是存在对应关系的。因此,该发送端可以通过向该接收端指示携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数以告知该接收端切换步进。此外,虽然该接收端已知第一帧中包含的携带业务信息的符号的个数,但该第二帧中包含冗余信息,当该接收端获知该携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数之后,该接收端可以更加准确 地解调携带业务信息的符号,并且丢弃携带冗余的符号。有利于避免该接收端将携带业务信息的符号丢弃而造成数据传输缺失。When the handover information includes the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information, since the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when this frame is determined The number of symbols transmitted in, the time length of transmitting each symbol can be calculated, that is, the aforementioned second period. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end. In addition, although the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information. When the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
根据第三方面的第二种实施方式,本申请实施例第三方面的第三种实施方式中,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。According to the second implementation manner of the third aspect, in the third implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. frequency.
本实施方式中,该接收端可以获知在该第二帧之后的若干帧是否也需要切换符号带宽,有利于该接收端为后续的切换操作做准备。In this embodiment, the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame, which is beneficial for the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent switching operation.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种接收端,该接收端包括如下部分:接收模块,用于采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务的第一信息,该第一信息位于第一帧中。此外,该接收模块,还用于采用第二符号带宽从该发送端接收该业务的第二信息,该第二信息位于第二帧中,采用该第一符号带宽传输该第一信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该第二信息的时长相同,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a receiving end. The receiving end includes the following parts: a receiving module for receiving first information of a service from the transmitting end using a first symbol bandwidth, the first information being located in the first frame in. In addition, the receiving module is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second information of the service from the transmitting end, the second information is located in the second frame, and the first symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the first information and the length of time The second symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the second information for the same duration, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame.
本实施方式中,在相同的时间中,该第一帧与该第二帧分别传输了不同的数量的符号。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率与传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率不同。由于,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率大于传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率。由于,该第一帧与该第二帧中均携带了业务信息,即前述第一信息和前述第二信息均为该业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In this embodiment, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
根据第四方面,本申请实施例第四方面的第一种实施方式中,该第一帧还包括切换信息,该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。According to the fourth aspect, in the first implementation manner of the fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
本实施方式中,由于发送端发给接收端的第一帧除了携带了业务信息还携带了切换信息,因此,不仅可以在该发送端切换符号带宽之前就通知接收端调整符号带宽,还可以使该接收端从该第一帧中获取业务信息以保证业务的持续进行。In this embodiment, since the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries switching information in addition to the service information, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but also the The receiving end obtains the service information from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service.
根据第四方面的第一种实施方式中,本申请实施例第四方面的第二种实施方式中,该切换信息包括如下任意一项:该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;或者,该切换步进;或者,第二周期,该第二周期与一个该切换步进对应,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;或者,携带该第二信息的符号数。According to the first implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the second implementation manner of the fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used To indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second period, the second period corresponding to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or , The number of symbols carrying the second information.
本实施方式中,当该切换信息为该切换步进的标识时,该切换步进的标识与该切换步进一一对应。因此,当该发送端将该切换步进的标识发送至该接收端时,该接收端可以通过查找该标识与切换步进对应关系表获知该切换步进。在这样的实现方式中,由于,发送切换步进的标识数据量仅为1比特或2比特,因此,该切换信息仅占用第一帧中的较小部分的传输资源,有利于该第一帧携带更多的业务信息。In this embodiment, when the switching information is the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step corresponds to the switching step in a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification and the switching step. In such an implementation manner, since the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits, the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame. Carry more business information.
当该切换信息为该切换步进时,该接收端可以直接根据该发送端发送的切换步进确定符号带宽需要调整的量。因此,相比于前一种实现方式,该接收端无需执行查表的操作,可以直接获知切换步进,有利于减少该接收端的计算量,减轻接收端的计算负荷。When the switching information is the switching step, the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
当该切换信息为第二周期时,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长,该第二周期的倒数为该第二符号带宽。又由于,该第一符号带宽的大小对于该接收端是已知的,因此,该接收端可以计算出该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值,即该切换步进。因此,该第二周期与该切换步进存在对应关系。本实现方式相对于前述实现方式增加了表示切换步进的方式,可以使该发送端发送给该接收端的切换信息灵活多样。When the switching information is the second period, the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth, and the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth. Also, since the size of the first symbol bandwidth is known to the receiving end, the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step. Compared with the foregoing implementation, this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
当该切换信息包括携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数时,由于,传输一个帧所需要的时间对于发送端和接收端均为已知的,当确定了这一个帧中传输的符号的个数,则可以计算出传输每一个符号的时长,即前述第二周期。由于,前述第二周期与前述切换步进是存在对应关系的。因此,该发送端可以通过向该接收端指示携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数以告知该接收端切换步进。此外,虽然该接收端已知第一帧中包含的携带业务信息的符号的个数,但该第二帧中包含冗余信息,当该接收端获知该携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数之后,该接收端可以更加准确地解调携带业务信息的符号,并且丢弃携带冗余的符号。有利于避免该接收端将携带业务信息的符号丢弃而造成数据传输缺失。When the handover information includes the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information, since the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when this frame is determined The number of symbols transmitted in, the time length of transmitting each symbol can be calculated, that is, the aforementioned second period. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end. In addition, although the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information. When the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
根据第四方面的第二种实施方式中,本申请实施例第四方面的第三种实施方式中,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。According to the second implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the third implementation manner of the fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is that the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. The number of times.
本实施方式中,该接收端可以获知在该第二帧之后的若干帧是否也需要切换符号带宽,有利于该接收端为后续的切换操作做准备。In this embodiment, the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame, which is beneficial for the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent switching operation.
根据第四方面、第四方面的第一种实施方式至第四方面的第三种实施方式中的任意一种实施方式,本申请实施例第四方面的第四种实施方式中,该接收端包括处理模块。其中,该处理模块,用于从该第一帧提取该切换信息。此外,该处理模块,还用于根据该切换步进调整采样频率,该采样频率的倒数为该第二周期。According to the fourth aspect, the first implementation manner of the fourth aspect to the third implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the fourth implementation manner of the fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the receiving end Including processing modules. Wherein, the processing module is used to extract the switching information from the first frame. In addition, the processing module is further configured to adjust the sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period.
本实施方式中,该处理模块有利于补偿收发频偏,提高符号带宽切换的效率。In this embodiment, the processing module is beneficial to compensate for the frequency deviation of the transceiver and improve the efficiency of symbol bandwidth switching.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种带宽切换方法,在该方法中,发送端接收业务信息,然后,发送端采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送该业务信息,其中,该业务信息位于第一帧中。然后,该发送端采用该第二符号带宽向该接收端发送该业务信息和冗余信息,该业务信息和该冗余信息位于第二帧中。其次,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。In a fifth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a bandwidth switching method. In the method, the sending end receives service information, and then the sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the service information to the receiving end, where the service information is located in In the first frame. Then, the sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the service information and redundant information to the receiving end, where the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame. Secondly, the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
本申请实施例中,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。又由于,该第一帧仅携带了业务信息,该第二帧除了携带该业务信息之外,还携带了冗余信息。因此,该发送端需要在传输第一帧的时间内传输更多的信息,因此,可以确定该发送端传输该第一帧的速率小于该发送端传输该第二帧的速率。由于,该发送端在传输的第一帧和第二帧中均携带了业务信息,该业务信息为同一业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In the embodiment of the present application, the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information. Also, because the first frame only carries service information, the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
根据第五方面,本申请实施例第五方面的第一种实施方式中,该方法还包括:该发送端从该接收端接收确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该接收端已接收该切换信息。According to a fifth aspect, in a first implementation manner of the fifth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the method further includes: the sending end receives confirmation information from the receiving end, the confirmation information being used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information .
本实施方式中,由于该确认信息用于指示该接收端已接收该切换信息,因此,有利于该发送端获知该接收端解调该第一帧的情况。于是,该发送端在收到该确认信息之后便无需再等待,该发送端可以向该接收端发送第二帧。因此,有利于减缓发送端和接收端之间传输数据的时延,进而提高传输效率。In this embodiment, since the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information, it is beneficial for the sending end to learn that the receiving end demodulates the first frame. Therefore, the sending end does not need to wait any longer after receiving the confirmation information, and the sending end can send the second frame to the receiving end. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the time delay of data transmission between the sender and the receiver, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
根据第五方面或第五方面的第一种实施方式,本申请实施例第五方面的第二种实施方式中,该方法还包括:该发送端从该接收端接收传输质量信息,该传输质量信息用于指示该接收端采用该第二符号带宽接收该第二帧的质量。According to the fifth aspect or the first implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in the second implementation manner of the fifth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the method further includes: the transmitting end receives transmission quality information from the receiving end, and the transmission quality The information is used to indicate the quality of the receiving end that uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame.
本实施方式中,该发送端可以根据该传输质量信息的优劣确定是否需要继续调整符号带宽。因此,该发送端可以在保证信息传输质量的同时使得该符号带宽能够逐渐平稳切换,进而可以避免符号带宽不稳定而影响用户的业务体验。In this embodiment, the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Therefore, the sending end can enable the symbol bandwidth to be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种带宽切换方法,在该方法中,接收端采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务信息,该业务信息位于第一帧中。然后,该接收端采用第二符号带宽从该发送端接收该业务信息和该冗余信息,该业务信息和该冗余信息位于第二帧中。其中,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a bandwidth switching method. In this method, the receiving end uses the first symbol bandwidth to receive service information from the sending end, and the service information is located in the first frame. Then, the receiving end uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the service information and the redundant information from the sending end, where the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame. Wherein, the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
本申请实施例中,由于,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。又由于,该第一帧仅携带了业务信息,该第二帧除了携带该业务信息之外,还携带了冗余信息。因此,该发送端需要在传输第一帧的时间内传输更多的信息,因此,可以确定该发送端传输该第一帧的速率小于该发送端传输该第二帧的速率。由于,该发送端在传输的第一帧和第二帧中均携带了业务信息,该业务信息为同一业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In the embodiment of the present application, because the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information. Also, because the first frame only carries service information, the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
根据第六方面,本申请实施例第六方面的第一种实施方式中,该方法还包括:该接收端向该发送端发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该接收端已接收该切换信息。According to a sixth aspect, in a first implementation manner of the sixth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the method further includes: the receiving end sends confirmation information to the sending end, the confirmation information being used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information .
本实施方式中,由于该确认信息用于指示该接收端已接收该切换信息,因此,有利于该发送端获知该接收端解调该第一帧的情况。于是,该发送端在收到该确认信息之后便无需再等待,该发送端可以向该接收端发送第二帧。因此,有利于减缓发送端和接收端之间传输数据的时延,进而提高传输效率。In this embodiment, since the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information, it is beneficial for the sending end to learn that the receiving end demodulates the first frame. Therefore, the sending end does not need to wait any longer after receiving the confirmation information, and the sending end can send the second frame to the receiving end. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the time delay of data transmission between the sender and the receiver, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
根据第六方面或第六方面的第一种实施方式,本申请实施例第六方面的第二种实施方式中,该方法还包括:该接收端向该发送端发送传输质量信息,该传输质量信息用于指示该接收端采用该第二符号带宽接收该第二帧的质量。According to the sixth aspect or the first implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in the second implementation manner of the sixth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the method further includes: the receiving end sends transmission quality information to the sending end, and the transmission quality The information is used to indicate the quality of the receiving end that uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame.
本实施方式中,该发送端可以根据该传输质量信息的优劣确定是否需要继续调整符号带宽。因此,该发送端可以在保证信息传输质量的同时使得该符号带宽能够逐渐平稳切换,进而可以避免符号带宽不稳定而影响用户的业务体验。In this embodiment, the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Therefore, the sending end can enable the symbol bandwidth to be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种带宽切换方法,在该方法中,发送端接收业务的第一信息和业务的第二信息。然后,该发送端采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送该第一信息, 该第一信息位于第一帧中。然后,该发送端采用第二符号带宽向该接收端发送该第二信息,该第二信息位于第二帧中,采用第一符号带宽传输该第一信息的时长与采用第二符号带宽传输该第二信息的时长相同,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a bandwidth switching method, in which the sending end receives the first information of the service and the second information of the service. Then, the sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the first information to the receiving end, and the first information is located in the first frame. Then, the sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the second information to the receiving end. The second information is located in the second frame. The first information is transmitted using the first symbol bandwidth and the second symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the second information. The duration of the second information is the same, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame.
本实施例中,采用第一符号带宽传输该第一信息的时长与采用第二符号带宽传输该第二信息的时长相同。该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。由于,在相同的时间中,该第一帧与该第二帧分别传输了不同的数量的符号。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率与传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率不同。由于,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率大于传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率。由于,该第一帧与该第二帧中均携带了业务信息,即前述第一信息和前述第二信息均为该业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In this embodiment, the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth. The number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Because, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
根据第七方面,本申请实施例第七方面的第一种实施方式中,该方法还包括:该发送端从该接收端接收确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该接收端已接收该切换信息。According to a seventh aspect, in a first implementation manner of the seventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the method further includes: the sending end receives confirmation information from the receiving end, the confirmation information being used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information .
本实施方式中,由于该确认信息用于指示该接收端已接收该切换信息,因此,有利于该发送端获知该接收端解调该第一帧的情况。于是,该发送端在收到该确认信息之后便无需再等待,该发送端可以向该接收端发送第二帧。因此,有利于减缓发送端和接收端之间传输数据的时延,进而提高传输效率。In this embodiment, since the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information, it is beneficial for the sending end to learn that the receiving end demodulates the first frame. Therefore, the sending end does not need to wait any longer after receiving the confirmation information, and the sending end can send the second frame to the receiving end. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the time delay of data transmission between the sender and the receiver, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
根据第七方面或第七方面的第一种实施方式,本申请实施例第七方面的第二种实施方式中,该方法还包括:该发送端从该接收端接收传输质量信息,该传输质量信息用于指示该接收端采用该第二符号带宽接收该第二帧的质量。According to the seventh aspect or the first implementation manner of the seventh aspect, in the second implementation manner of the seventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the method further includes: the transmitting end receives the transmission quality information from the receiving end, and the transmission quality The information is used to indicate the quality of the receiving end that uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame.
本实施方式中,该发送端可以根据该传输质量信息的优劣确定是否需要继续调整符号带宽。因此,该发送端可以在保证信息传输质量的同时使得该符号带宽能够逐渐平稳切换,进而可以避免符号带宽不稳定而影响用户的业务体验。In this embodiment, the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Therefore, the sending end can enable the symbol bandwidth to be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种带宽切换方法,在该方法中,接收端采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务的第一信息,该第一信息位于第一帧中。然后,该接收端采用第二符号带宽从该发送端接收该业务的第二信息,该第二信息位于第二帧中。其中,采用该第一符号带宽传输该第一信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该第二信息的时长相同,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a bandwidth switching method. In the method, the receiving end uses the first symbol bandwidth to receive first information of the service from the transmitting end, and the first information is located in the first frame. Then, the receiving end uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second information of the service from the sending end, and the second information is located in the second frame. Wherein, the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than that in the second frame The number of symbols carrying the second information.
本实施方式中,在相同的时间中,该第一帧与该第二帧分别传输了不同的数量的符号。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率与传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率不同。由于,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率大于传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率。由于,该第一帧与该第二帧中均携带了业务信息,即前述第一信息和前述第二信息均为该业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In this embodiment, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
根据第八方面,本申请实施例第八方面的第一种实施方式中,该方法还包括:该接收端向该发送端发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该接收端已接收该切换信息。According to the eighth aspect, in the first implementation manner of the eighth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the method further includes: the receiving end sends confirmation information to the sending end, the confirmation information being used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information .
本实施方式中,由于该确认信息用于指示该接收端已接收该切换信息,因此,有利于该发送端获知该接收端解调该第一帧的情况。于是,该发送端在收到该确认信息之后便无需再等待,该发送端可以向该接收端发送第二帧。因此,有利于减缓发送端和接收端之间传输数据的时延,进而提高传输效率。In this embodiment, since the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information, it is beneficial for the sending end to learn that the receiving end demodulates the first frame. Therefore, the sending end does not need to wait any longer after receiving the confirmation information, and the sending end can send the second frame to the receiving end. Therefore, it is beneficial to reduce the time delay of data transmission between the sender and the receiver, thereby improving the transmission efficiency.
根据第八方面或第八方面的第一种实施方式,本申请实施例第八方面的第二种实施方式中,该方法还包括:该接收端向该发送端发送传输质量信息,该传输质量信息用于指示该接收端采用该第二符号带宽接收该第二帧的质量。According to the eighth aspect or the first implementation manner of the eighth aspect, in the second implementation manner of the eighth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the method further includes: the receiving end sends transmission quality information to the sending end, and the transmission quality The information is used to indicate the quality of the receiving end that uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame.
本实施方式中,该发送端可以根据该传输质量信息的优劣确定是否需要继续调整符号带宽。因此,该发送端可以在保证信息传输质量的同时使得该符号带宽能够逐渐平稳切换,进而可以避免符号带宽不稳定而影响用户的业务体验。In this embodiment, the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Therefore, the sending end can enable the symbol bandwidth to be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统,包括;发送端和接收端;该发送端执行如第五方面以及第五方面的各种实施方式所介绍的方法;该接收端执行如第六方面以及第六方面的各种实施方式所介绍的方法。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including: a sending end and a receiving end; the sending end executes the methods described in the fifth aspect and various implementation manners of the fifth aspect; the receiving end executes The sixth aspect and the methods introduced in the various implementations of the sixth aspect.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统,包括;发送端和接收端;该发送端执行如第七方面以及第七方面的各种实施方式所介绍的方法;该接收端执行如第八方面以及第八方面的各种实施方式所介绍的方法。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including; a sending end and a receiving end; the sending end executes the methods described in the seventh aspect and various implementation manners of the seventh aspect; the receiving end executes The eighth aspect and the methods introduced in various implementation manners of the eighth aspect.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如第五方面以及第五方面的各种实施方式、或第六方面以及第六方面的各种实施方式、第七方面以及第七方面的各种实施方式、或第八方面以及第八方面的各种实施方式所介绍的方法。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the fifth aspect and various implementation manners of the fifth aspect, or the sixth aspect. Aspects and various implementation manners of the sixth aspect, various implementation manners of the seventh aspect and the seventh aspect, or the eighth aspect and various implementation manners of the eighth aspect.
第十二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如第五方面以及第五方面的各种实施方式、或第六方面以及第六方面的各种实施方式、第七方面以及第七方面的各种实施方式、或第八方面以及第八方面的各种实施方式所介绍的方法。In the twelfth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the fifth aspect and various implementation manners of the fifth aspect, or the sixth aspect and The methods introduced in the various implementation manners of the sixth aspect, the seventh aspect and the seventh aspect, or the eighth aspect and the eighth aspect.
从以上技术方案可以看出,本申请实施例具有以下优点:It can be seen from the above technical solutions that the embodiments of the present application have the following advantages:
本申请实施例中,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。又由于,该第一帧仅携带了业务信息,该第二帧除了携带该业务信息之外,还携带了冗余信息。因此,该发送端需要在传输第一帧的时间内传输更多的信息,因此,可以确定该发送端传输该第一帧的速率小于该发送端传输该第二帧的速率。由于,该发送端在传输的第一帧和第二帧中均携带了业务信息,该业务信息为同一业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In the embodiment of the present application, the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information. Also, because the first frame only carries service information, the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
附图说明Description of the drawings
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附 图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本申请的一些实施例。In order to more clearly describe the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the accompanying drawings required in the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below. Obviously, the drawings in the following description are only some embodiments of the present application.
图1A为本申请实施例中带宽切换方法的一个应用场景图;FIG. 1A is an application scenario diagram of the bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of the application;
图1B为本申请实施例中带宽切换方法的另一个应用场景图;FIG. 1B is another application scenario diagram of the bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of this application;
图1C为本申请实施例中带宽切换方法的一个原理图;FIG. 1C is a schematic diagram of a bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of the application;
图1D为本申请实施例中发送端的一个实施例示意图;FIG. 1D is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of the application;
图1E为本申请实施例中发送端的另一个实施例示意图;FIG. 1E is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application;
图1F为本申请实施例中接收端的一个实施例示意图;FIG. 1F is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the receiving end in an embodiment of the application;
图1G为本申请实施例中接收端的另一个实施例示意图;FIG. 1G is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in an embodiment of this application;
图2A为本申请实施例中发送端的另一个实施例示意图;2A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application;
图2B为本申请实施例中发送端的另一个实施例示意图;2B is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of the application;
图2C为本申请实施例中发送端的另一个实施例示意图;2C is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of the application;
图2D为本申请实施例中发送端的另一个实施例示意图;2D is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application;
图2D-1为本申请实施例中第一帧结构的一个实施例示意图;FIG. 2D-1 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a first frame structure in an embodiment of this application;
图2D-2为本申请实施例中第二帧结构的一个实施例示意图;2D-2 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a second frame structure in an embodiment of the application;
图2E为本申请实施例中发送端的另一个实施例示意图;2E is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application;
图2E-1为本申请实施例中第一帧结构的另一个实施例示意图;2E-1 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the first frame structure in an embodiment of the application;
图2E-2为本申请实施例中第二帧结构的另一个实施例示意图;2E-2 is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the second frame structure in an embodiment of this application;
图2F为本申请实施例中发送端的另一个实施例示意图;2F is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the sending end in an embodiment of this application;
图3A为本申请实施例中接收端的另一个实施例示意图;FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in an embodiment of the application;
图3B为本申请实施例中接收端的另一个实施例示意图;FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in the embodiment of this application;
图3C为本申请实施例中接收端的另一个实施例示意图;3C is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in the embodiment of the application;
图3D为本申请实施例中接收端的另一个实施例示意图;FIG. 3D is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in the embodiment of this application;
图3E为本申请实施例中接收端的另一个实施例示意图;FIG. 3E is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the receiving end in an embodiment of this application;
图4为本申请实施例中带宽切换方法的一个流程图;FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of the application;
图5为本申请实施例中带宽切换方法的另一个流程图。Fig. 5 is another flowchart of the bandwidth switching method in an embodiment of the application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are only a part of the embodiments of the present application, rather than all the embodiments.
本申请的说明书和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“第四”等(如果存在)是用于区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的数据在适当情况下可以互换,以便这里描述的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的内容以外的顺序实施。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。The terms "first", "second", "third", "fourth", etc. (if any) in the description and claims of this application and the above-mentioned drawings are used to distinguish similar objects, without having to use To describe a specific order or sequence. It should be understood that the data used in this way can be interchanged under appropriate circumstances, so that the embodiments described herein can be implemented in a sequence other than the content illustrated or described herein. In addition, the terms "including" and "having" and any variations of them are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusions. For example, a process, method, system, product, or device that includes a series of steps or units is not necessarily limited to those clearly listed. Those steps or units may include other steps or units that are not clearly listed or are inherent to these processes, methods, products, or equipment.
本申请实施例提供了一种发送端、接收端以及带宽切换方法,用于保证业务不中断的情况下调整发送端和接收端之间传输业务信息的符号带宽。The embodiments of the present application provide a sending end, a receiving end, and a bandwidth switching method, which are used to adjust the symbol bandwidth for transmitting service information between the sending end and the receiving end without interrupting services.
为便于理解,下面先对本申请实施例所涉及的部分技术术语进行解释:For ease of understanding, some technical terms involved in the embodiments of this application are explained below:
传输容量(throughput):指单位时间内传输净荷(payload)比特的个数,单位为Mbps或M·bit/s。该传输容量与调制模式、码率和符号带宽相关,其关系可以表示为:T=M×R×F。其中,M为调制模式(M-ary Modulation),单位为bit,表示每个发送符号中携带的比特个数。例如,当调制模式为16QAM调制,则M=4bit;当调制模式为256QAM调制,则M=8bit。R为码率(rate),单位为%,表示净荷比特占发送符号的比特的比例。例如,当调制模式为256QAM时,每个发送符号有8个比特,其中有6个比特为净荷比特,2个比特为开销(overhead),因此,码率为75%。F为符号带宽(symbolfrequency),单位为MHz,表示传输发送符号所包含的各种不同频率成分所占据的频率范围,即表示发送符号的频率,也被称为频域信号宽度或波道带宽。1/F为周期,指采用该符号带宽发送一个符号的时长。其中,当该符号带宽F的单位为MHz时,该周期1/F的单位为us;当该符号带宽F的单位为KHz时,该周期1/F的单位为ms;当该符号带宽F的单位为Hz时,该周期1/F的单位为s。Transmission capacity (throughput): Refers to the number of payload bits transmitted in a unit time, in Mbps or M·bit/s. The transmission capacity is related to the modulation mode, code rate, and symbol bandwidth, and the relationship can be expressed as: T=M×R×F. Among them, M is the modulation mode (M-ary Modulation), the unit is bit, which represents the number of bits carried in each transmitted symbol. For example, when the modulation mode is 16QAM modulation, M=4bit; when the modulation mode is 256QAM modulation, M=8bit. R is the code rate (rate), the unit is %, which represents the ratio of payload bits to the bits of the transmitted symbol. For example, when the modulation mode is 256QAM, each transmitted symbol has 8 bits, of which 6 bits are payload bits and 2 bits are overhead. Therefore, the code rate is 75%. F is the symbol frequency (symbol frequency), the unit is MHz, which represents the frequency range occupied by the various frequency components contained in the transmitted symbol, that is, the frequency of the transmitted symbol, and is also called the frequency domain signal width or channel bandwidth. 1/F is the period, which refers to the length of time that one symbol is sent using the symbol bandwidth. Among them, when the unit of the symbol bandwidth F is MHz, the unit of the period 1/F is us; when the unit of the symbol bandwidth F is KHz, the unit of the period 1/F is ms; when the unit of the symbol bandwidth F is When the unit is Hz, the unit of this period 1/F is s.
符号(symbol):也被称为发送符号或星座符号,指将多个比特经调制而得到的一个传输单元。Symbol: Also known as transmission symbol or constellation symbol, it refers to a transmission unit obtained by modulating multiple bits.
调制映射(modulation mapping,MAP):也被称为星座映射或星座调制,指一类调制方式,可以将多个比特映射为一个传输单元,即将多个比特调制为一个符号。例如,正交相移键控(quadrature phase shift keying,QPSK)调制、二进制相移键控(binary phase shift keying,BPSK)调制以及正交振幅调制(quadrature amplitude modulation,QAM)等。Modulation mapping (MAP): Also known as constellation mapping or constellation modulation, it refers to a type of modulation method that can map multiple bits into one transmission unit, that is, modulate multiple bits into one symbol. For example, quadrature phase shift keying (quadrature phase shift keying, QPSK) modulation, binary phase shift keying (binary phase shift keying, BPSK) modulation, and quadrature amplitude modulation (quadrature amplitude modulation, QAM), etc.
随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM):是与中央处理器(centra processing unit,CPU)直接交换数据的内部存储器。可以随时从任何一个指定的地址写入(存入)或读出(取出)信息,通常作为操作系统或其他正在运行中的程序的临时数据存储介质。Random access memory (RAM): It is an internal memory that directly exchanges data with a central processing unit (CPU). Information can be written (stored in) or read (taken out) from any designated address at any time, and is usually used as a temporary data storage medium for operating systems or other running programs.
晶体振荡器(crystal oscillator):也被称为石英晶体谐振器,简称晶振,指添加集成电路(integrated circuit,IC)组成振荡电路的晶体元件,可以产生标准脉冲信号,作为数字电路中的同步时钟。Crystal oscillator (crystal oscillator): also known as quartz crystal resonator, crystal oscillator for short, refers to the crystal element that adds an integrated circuit (IC) to form an oscillator circuit, which can generate a standard pulse signal as a synchronous clock in a digital circuit .
根升余弦滤波器(root raised cosine filter,RRC):也被称为平方根根升余弦滤波器(square root raised cosine filter,SRRC),用于消除码间串扰(inter symbol interference,ISI),提高接收端接收信号的采样精度。Root raised cosine filter (RRC): also known as square root raised cosine filter (SRRC), used to eliminate inter-symbol interference (ISI) and improve reception The sampling accuracy of the signal received at the end.
插值滤波器(interpolation filter,Interp):用于在离散的信号之间插值以改变信号的采样率。Interpolation filter (Interp): used to interpolate between discrete signals to change the sampling rate of the signal.
下面对本申请实施例所提出的发送端、接收端以及带宽切换方法的应用场景进行介绍:The following describes the application scenarios of the sending end, the receiving end, and the bandwidth switching method proposed in the embodiments of the present application:
本实施例中,发送端与接收端分别位于两个不同的网络设备中。当前述两个不同的网络设备之间传输数据的符号带宽需要切换时,前述发送端和前述接收端将采用本申请实施 例所提出的带宽切换方法切换符号带宽。In this embodiment, the sending end and the receiving end are located in two different network devices. When the symbol bandwidth for data transmission between the aforementioned two different network devices needs to be switched, the aforementioned sending end and the aforementioned receiving end will use the bandwidth switching method proposed in the embodiment of the present application to switch the symbol bandwidth.
在实际应用中,该发送端可以是设备或该设备中的芯片,该接收端也可以是设备或该设备中的芯片,具体此处不做限定。无论作为设备还是作为芯片,该发送端或该接收端均可以作为独立的产品进行制造、销售或者使用。In practical applications, the sending end may be a device or a chip in the device, and the receiving end may also be a device or a chip in the device, which is not specifically limited here. Whether as a device or as a chip, the sending end or the receiving end can be manufactured, sold, or used as an independent product.
还应注意的是,在实际应用中,该发送端和该接收端常常被制造为芯片。如图1A所示,该发送端和该接收端可以集成为一块芯片,即该芯片同时具有发送端的功能和接收端的功能。此时,网络设备1和网络设备2中分别安装一块芯片即可。如图1B所示,该发送端和该接收端也可以制造为两块具备不同功能芯片,即一块芯片具备发送端的功能,另一块芯片具备接收端的功能。此时,网络设备1和网络设备2中均需安装一块具有发送端功能的芯片和一块具有接收端功能的芯片。应当理解的是,在实际应用中,前述每个网络设备中的芯片的数量将因应用场景的不同将有所差异,具体此处不做限定。It should also be noted that in practical applications, the sending end and the receiving end are often manufactured as chips. As shown in FIG. 1A, the sending end and the receiving end can be integrated into a chip, that is, the chip has both the function of the sending end and the function of the receiving end. At this time, it is sufficient to install a chip in the network device 1 and the network device 2 respectively. As shown in FIG. 1B, the sending end and the receiving end can also be manufactured as two chips with different functions, that is, one chip has the function of the sending end, and the other chip has the function of the receiving end. At this time, both the network device 1 and the network device 2 need to install a chip with a transmitter function and a chip with a receiver function. It should be understood that in actual applications, the number of chips in each of the aforementioned network devices will vary due to different application scenarios, and the specific number is not limited here.
此外,前述网络设备可以为无线接入网络(radio access network,RAN)设备。具体地,该RAN设备可以是基站或接入点,也可以是接入网中在空中接口上通过一个或多个小区与终端设备通信的设备。例如,RAN设备可以是新无线NR系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB),或者云接入网(Cloud RAN)系统中的集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributedy unit,DU),本申请实施例并不限定。前述网络设备也可以为无线网络回传设备(radio backhaul),具体用于从远端站点到中心站点之间的基站与基站间的通信。前述网络设备还可以为接入和回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)基站,具体此处不做限定。In addition, the aforementioned network equipment may be a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) equipment. Specifically, the RAN device may be a base station or an access point, or a device that communicates with the terminal device through one or more cells on the air interface in the access network. For example, the RAN equipment can be the next generation node B (gNB) in the new wireless NR system, or the centralized unit (CU) and distributed unit in the Cloud RAN system. (distributed unit, DU), the embodiment of this application is not limited. The aforementioned network device may also be a wireless network backhaul device (radio backhaul), which is specifically used for communication between the base station and the base station from the remote site to the central site. The aforementioned network equipment may also be an integrated access and backhaul (IAB) base station, which is not specifically limited here.
应当理解的是,除了前述场景之外,该带宽切换方法还可以应用于其他连续传输场景,例如,如光纤传输场景、有线电视电缆(Cable)方式的宽带接入场景、各种数字用户线路(digital subscriber line,DSL)的传输场景以及微波通信场景等,具体此处不做限定。It should be understood that, in addition to the foregoing scenarios, the bandwidth switching method can also be applied to other continuous transmission scenarios, such as optical fiber transmission scenarios, broadband access scenarios in cable television mode, and various digital subscriber lines ( Digital subscriber line (DSL) transmission scenarios and microwave communication scenarios, etc., are not specifically limited here.
为便于理解本申请实施例所提出的带宽切换方法,下面将对该带宽切换方法的实现原理进行介绍。To facilitate the understanding of the bandwidth switching method proposed in the embodiment of the present application, the implementation principle of the bandwidth switching method will be introduced below.
在无线通信中,发送端和接收端之间的数据传输的单位可以为帧,一个帧包含多个符号。其中,每个符号包含发送端和接收端之间需要传输的多个信息比特。前述多个信息比特可以经调制映射组成前述一个符号。例如,若将两个比特划分为一组进行调制,则可以将前述两个比特经QPSK调制成一个符号。应当理解的是,在实际应用中,可以根据不同的场景需求采用不同的调制映射方式,具体此处不做限定。In wireless communication, the unit of data transmission between the sending end and the receiving end can be a frame, and a frame contains multiple symbols. Among them, each symbol contains multiple information bits that need to be transmitted between the sender and the receiver. The foregoing multiple information bits can be modulated and mapped to form the foregoing one symbol. For example, if two bits are divided into a group for modulation, the aforementioned two bits can be QPSK modulated into one symbol. It should be understood that in actual applications, different modulation and mapping modes can be used according to different scene requirements, and the specifics are not limited here.
一般地,虽然,发送端的晶振产生的时钟与接收端的晶振产生的时钟存在部分偏移,使得发送端的时钟与接收端的时钟不完全同步。但是,在接收端安装符号同步环可以使该接收端的时钟与该发送端的时钟保持同步。于是,当发送端和接收端之间预先协商后续一帧或多帧包含的符号的个数以及发送每个符号所需要的时间后,该发送端向该接收端发送一个帧的同时,该接收端可以按照该发送端发送该帧的速率接收该帧,即该发送端发送帧的符号带宽与该接收端接收该帧的符号带宽相同。当该发送端需要调整符号带宽时,该发送端可以通过调整发送该帧中的每个符号的时长以调整符号带宽。由于,符号带宽与发送 端发送每个符号的时长呈反相关,则可以通过减小发送端发送每个符号的时长以增大符号带宽,可以通过增大发送端发送每个符号的时长以减小符号带宽。Generally, although the clock generated by the crystal oscillator at the transmitting end is partially offset from the clock generated by the crystal oscillator at the receiving end, the clock at the transmitting end is not completely synchronized with the clock at the receiving end. However, installing a symbol synchronization loop at the receiving end can keep the clock of the receiving end synchronized with the clock of the sending end. Therefore, when the sending end and the receiving end negotiate in advance the number of symbols contained in one or more frames and the time required to send each symbol, the sending end sends a frame to the receiving end at the same time, the receiving end The end can receive the frame at the rate at which the sender sends the frame, that is, the symbol bandwidth of the frame sent by the sender is the same as the symbol bandwidth of the frame received by the receiver. When the sending end needs to adjust the symbol bandwidth, the sending end can adjust the symbol bandwidth by adjusting the duration of sending each symbol in the frame. Since the symbol bandwidth is inversely related to the duration of each symbol sent by the transmitter, the symbol bandwidth can be increased by reducing the duration of each symbol sent by the transmitter, and the duration of each symbol sent by the transmitter can be increased to reduce Small symbol bandwidth.
为便于理解,以图1C所示的帧结构为例进行介绍。假设,该发送端与接收端的时钟同步,并且预先协商一帧中包含200个符号,其中,这200个符号包括帧头前导码和净荷符号。例如,第1至10个符号为帧头前导码部分,第11至200个符号为净荷符号部分,该净荷符号部分为实际需要传输的信息。在实际应用中,前述帧头前导码部分包含的符号的个数与该净荷符号部分包含的符号个数可以根据具体需求进行调整,具体此处不做限定。此外,假设该发送端发送一个帧所需要的时间为T,则该发送端发送每个符号所需要的时间为T/200,该符号带宽为200/T。当该发送端需要增大带宽时,该发送端可以减小发送每个符号的时间。例如,将发送每个符号的时间调整为T/205,此时,该发送端在原本发送200个符号的时间内可以发送205个符号。于是该发送端将在前述200个符号后配置5个符号,这5个符号是为了保持时间同步而配置的冗余符号。此时,该接收端需按照该发送端的指示将接收每个符号的时间调整为T/205,以保证与该发送端同步。当该接收端将接收每个符号的时间调整为T/205时,则该接收端也将符号带宽调整为205/T。于是,完成了符号带宽的切换。For ease of understanding, the frame structure shown in FIG. 1C is taken as an example for introduction. It is assumed that the clocks of the sending end and the receiving end are synchronized, and it is negotiated in advance that a frame contains 200 symbols, where the 200 symbols include the frame header preamble and payload symbols. For example, the 1st to 10th symbols are the preamble part of the frame header, and the 11th to 200th symbols are the payload symbol part, and the payload symbol part is the information that actually needs to be transmitted. In practical applications, the number of symbols included in the preamble part of the frame header and the number of symbols included in the payload symbol part can be adjusted according to specific requirements, which are not specifically limited here. In addition, assuming that the time required for the sending end to send a frame is T, the time required for the sending end to send each symbol is T/200, and the symbol bandwidth is 200/T. When the sending end needs to increase the bandwidth, the sending end can reduce the time to send each symbol. For example, if the time for sending each symbol is adjusted to T/205, at this time, the sending end can send 205 symbols within the original time of sending 200 symbols. Therefore, the transmitter will configure 5 symbols after the aforementioned 200 symbols, and these 5 symbols are redundant symbols configured to maintain time synchronization. At this time, the receiving end needs to adjust the time of receiving each symbol to T/205 according to the instructions of the sending end to ensure synchronization with the sending end. When the receiving end adjusts the time for receiving each symbol to T/205, the receiving end also adjusts the symbol bandwidth to 205/T. Thus, the switching of the symbol bandwidth is completed.
应当理解的是,图1C所示的帧结构仅仅是为介绍调整符号带宽的原理而列举的示例,并不对本实施例以及后续实施例中的帧结构进行限定。It should be understood that the frame structure shown in FIG. 1C is only an example for introducing the principle of adjusting the symbol bandwidth, and does not limit the frame structure in this embodiment and subsequent embodiments.
上面介绍了本申请实施例的带宽切换方法的实现原理,下面将分别对本申请实施例所提出的发送端和接收端的主要结构进行介绍。The implementation principle of the bandwidth switching method in the embodiment of the present application has been introduced above, and the main structures of the transmitting end and the receiving end proposed in the embodiments of the present application will be respectively introduced below.
下面先对发送端的主要结构进行介绍:The following first introduces the main structure of the sender:
当该发送端执行增大符号带宽的功能时,如图1D所示,该发送端10包括接收模块101和发送模块102。其中,该接收模块101,用于接收业务信息,该业务信息指该发送端与接收端之间进行的业务的信息。该发送模块102,用于采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送该业务信息。其中,该业务信息位于第一帧中,即该发送端与该接收端之间的数据传输是以帧为单位,该发送模块102通过第一帧向该接收端发送该业务信息。此外,该发送模块102,还用于采用该第二符号带宽向该接收端发送该业务信息和冗余信息。其中,该业务信息和该冗余信息位于第二帧中,即该发送模块102将该业务信息与该冗余信息封装在该第二帧中以发送至该接收端。When the sending end performs the function of increasing the symbol bandwidth, as shown in FIG. 1D, the sending end 10 includes a receiving module 101 and a sending module 102. Wherein, the receiving module 101 is configured to receive service information, and the service information refers to information of the service performed between the sending end and the receiving end. The sending module 102 is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to send the service information to the receiving end. The service information is located in the first frame, that is, the data transmission between the sending end and the receiving end is in units of frames, and the sending module 102 sends the service information to the receiving end through the first frame. In addition, the sending module 102 is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the service information and redundant information to the receiving end. The service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame, that is, the sending module 102 encapsulates the service information and the redundant information in the second frame to send to the receiving end.
应当理解的是,本实施方式中,前述第一符号带宽小于前述第二符号带宽。It should be understood that, in this embodiment, the foregoing first symbol bandwidth is smaller than the foregoing second symbol bandwidth.
其中,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。又由于,该第一帧仅携带了业务信息,该第二帧除了携带该业务信息之外,还携带了冗余信息。因此,该发送端需要在传输第一帧的时间内传输更多的信息,因此,可以确定该发送端传输该第一帧的速率小于该发送端传输该第二帧的速率。由于,该发送端在传输的第一帧和第二帧中均携带了业务信息,该业务信息为同一业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。Wherein, the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information. Also, because the first frame only carries service information, the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
此外,该发送端还包括处理模块103。该处理模块103,用于在该业务信息的末尾配置该冗余信息得到该第二帧。然后,该处理模块103将该第二帧传输至该发送模块102,以使得该发送模块102向接收端发送该第二帧。In addition, the sending end also includes a processing module 103. The processing module 103 is configured to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame. Then, the processing module 103 transmits the second frame to the sending module 102, so that the sending module 102 sends the second frame to the receiving end.
具体地,图1D中的发送端10中的接收模块101可以为后文图2A中的切换信息接收模块202,该发送模块102可以为后文图2A中的第一收发模块205,该处理模块103包括后文图2A中的符号带宽适配模块203、第一切换控制器201和符号带宽使能模块204。具体地,请参见后文图2A中的相关介绍。Specifically, the receiving module 101 in the sending end 10 in FIG. 1D may be the switching information receiving module 202 in FIG. 2A later, and the sending module 102 may be the first transceiver module 205 in FIG. 2A later, and the processing module 103 includes the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, the first switching controller 201, and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 in FIG. 2A below. Specifically, please refer to the related introduction in Figure 2A below.
进一步地,该处理模块103可以采用如下实现方式:Further, the processing module 103 may adopt the following implementation modes:
在一种可选的实现方式中,该处理模块103包括先入先出模块FIFO和选择器。其中,该FIFO,用于缓存该业务信息,并将该业务信息输入至该选择器。该选择器,用于在该业务信息的末尾配置该冗余信息得到该第二帧,并按照该第二周期对应的频率输出该第二帧。具体地,该处理模块可以采用后文中的图2A中的符号带宽适配模块203的实现方式。此外,前述FIFO和前述选择器的具体功能可以参见后文图2B中FIFO 2031和选择器2032中的相关介绍,具体此处不再赘述。In an optional implementation manner, the processing module 103 includes a first-in first-out module FIFO and a selector. Wherein, the FIFO is used to buffer the business information and input the business information to the selector. The selector is configured to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame, and output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second period. Specifically, the processing module may adopt the implementation manner of the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 in FIG. 2A below. In addition, for the specific functions of the aforementioned FIFO and the aforementioned selector, please refer to the related introduction of the FIFO 2031 and the selector 2032 in FIG. 2B later, and the details will not be repeated here.
在另一种可选的实现方式中,该处理模块103包括随机存取存储器RAM,该RAM用于缓存该业务信息,在该业务信息的末尾配置该冗余信息得到该第二帧,并按照该第二周期对应的频率输出该第二帧。具体地,该处理模块可以采用后文中的图2A中的符号带宽适配模块203的实现方式。此外,前述RAM的具体功能可以参见后文图2C中RAM 2033中的相关介绍,具体此处不再赘述。In another optional implementation manner, the processing module 103 includes a random access memory RAM, which is used to cache the service information, configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame, and follow The second frame is output at the frequency corresponding to the second period. Specifically, the processing module may adopt the implementation manner of the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 in FIG. 2A below. In addition, the specific functions of the aforementioned RAM can be referred to the related introduction in RAM 2033 in FIG. 2C later, and details are not repeated here.
此外,前述第一帧还包括切换信息,该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。In addition, the aforementioned first frame further includes switching information, which is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
可选的,该切换信息可以为该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进。此时,该发送端与该接收端中均存储有切换步进的标识与切换步进的对应关系表,具体地,该对应关系表可以如下表1所示:Optionally, the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step. At this time, both the sending end and the receiving end store a correspondence table of the identification of the switching step and the switching step. Specifically, the correspondence table may be as shown in Table 1 below:
表1Table 1
切换步进的标识Toggle the logo of the step 切换步进Switch step
0101 1M1M
0202 4M4M
0303 8M8M
如上表1所示,由于,该切换步进的标识与该切换步进一一对应,因此,当该发送端将该切换步进的标识发送至该接收端时,该接收端可以通过查找上述对应关系表获知该切换步进。在这样的实现方式中,由于,发送切换步进的标识数据量仅为1比特或2比特,因此,该切换信息仅占用前述第一帧中的较小部分的传输资源,有利于该第一帧携带更多的业务信息。As shown in Table 1 above, since the identification of the switching step corresponds to the switching step one-to-one, when the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can search for the above The corresponding relationship table learns the switching step. In such an implementation manner, since the amount of identification data for sending the switching step is only 1 bit or 2 bits, the switching information only occupies a small part of the transmission resources in the foregoing first frame, which is beneficial to the first frame. The frame carries more business information.
可选的,该切换信息可以为前述切换步进。在这样的实现方式中,该接收端可以直接 根据该发送端发送的切换步进确定符号带宽需要调整的量。因此,相比于前一种实现方式,该接收端无需执行查表的操作,可以直接获知切换步进,有利于减少该接收端的计算量,减轻接收端的计算负荷。Optionally, the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step. In such an implementation manner, the receiving end can directly determine the amount by which the symbol bandwidth needs to be adjusted according to the switching step sent by the sending end. Therefore, compared with the previous implementation manner, the receiving end does not need to perform a table look-up operation, and can directly learn the switching step, which is beneficial to reducing the calculation amount of the receiving end and reducing the calculation load of the receiving end.
可选的,该切换信息可以为第二周期,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长,该第二周期的倒数为该第二符号带宽。又由于,该第一符号带宽的大小对于该接收端是已知的,因此,该接收端可以计算出该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值,即该切换步进。因此,该第二周期与该切换步进存在对应关系。本实现方式相对于前述实现方式增加了表示切换步进的方式,可以使该发送端发送给该接收端的切换信息灵活多样。Optionally, the switching information may be a second period, where the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth, and the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth. Also, since the size of the first symbol bandwidth is known to the receiving end, the receiving end can calculate the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth, that is, the switching step. Therefore, there is a corresponding relationship between the second period and the switching step. Compared with the foregoing implementation, this implementation method adds a way to indicate the switching step, which can make the switching information sent by the sending end to the receiving end flexible and diverse.
可选的,该切换信息可以包括携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数。由于,传输一个帧所需要的时间对于发送端和接收端均为已知的,当确定了这一个帧中传输的符号的个数,则可以计算出传输每一个符号的时长,即前述第二周期。由于,前述第二周期与前述切换步进是存在对应关系的。因此,该发送端可以通过向该接收端指示携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数以告知该接收端切换步进。此外,虽然该接收端已知第一帧中包含的携带业务信息的符号的个数,但该第二帧中包含冗余信息,当该接收端获知该携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数之后,该接收端可以更加准确地解调携带业务信息的符号,并且丢弃携带冗余的符号。有利于避免该接收端将携带业务信息的符号丢弃而造成数据传输缺失。Optionally, the switching information may include the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information. Since the time required to transmit a frame is known to both the sender and the receiver, when the number of symbols transmitted in this frame is determined, the duration of each symbol can be calculated, that is, the second cycle. Because there is a corresponding relationship between the foregoing second period and the foregoing switching step. Therefore, the sending end can inform the receiving end of the switching step by indicating the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information to the receiving end. In addition, although the receiving end knows the number of symbols carrying service information contained in the first frame, the second frame contains redundant information. When the receiving end learns the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the service information After the number of redundant information symbols, the receiving end can demodulate the symbols carrying service information more accurately, and discard the symbols carrying redundancy. It is beneficial to prevent the receiving end from discarding the symbols carrying service information and causing loss of data transmission.
可选的,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。因此,该接收端可以获知在该第二帧之后的若干帧是否也需要切换符号带宽。有利于该接收端为后续的切换操作做准备。Optionally, the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Therefore, the receiving end can learn whether the symbol bandwidth needs to be switched for several frames after the second frame. It is helpful for the receiving end to prepare for the subsequent handover operation.
当该发送端执行减小符号带宽的功能时,如图1E所示,该发送端10包括接收模块101和发送模块102。其中,该接收模块101,用于接收业务的第一信息和该业务的第二信息。该业务为该发送端与该接收端之间当前传输的业务。该发送模块102,用于采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送该第一信息,该第一信息位于第一帧中。即该发送端与该接收端之间的数据传输是以帧为单位,该发送模块102通过第一帧向该接收端发送该第一信息。此外,该发送模块102,还用于采用第二符号带宽向该接收端发送该第二信息。其中,该第二信息位于第二帧中,即该发送模块102在该第二帧中仅发送了第二信息。When the sending end performs the function of reducing the symbol bandwidth, as shown in FIG. 1E, the sending end 10 includes a receiving module 101 and a sending module 102. Wherein, the receiving module 101 is used to receive the first information of the service and the second information of the service. The service is the service currently transmitted between the sending end and the receiving end. The sending module 102 is configured to send the first information to the receiving end using the first symbol bandwidth, and the first information is located in the first frame. That is, the data transmission between the sending end and the receiving end is in units of frames, and the sending module 102 sends the first information to the receiving end through the first frame. In addition, the sending module 102 is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the second information to the receiving end. The second information is located in the second frame, that is, the sending module 102 only sends the second information in the second frame.
应当理解的是,本实施方式中,前述第一符号带宽大于前述第二符号带宽。It should be understood that, in this embodiment, the foregoing first symbol bandwidth is greater than the foregoing second symbol bandwidth.
其中,采用第一符号带宽传输该第一信息的时长与采用第二符号带宽传输该第二信息的时长相同。该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。由于,在相同的时间中,该第一帧与该第二帧分别传输了不同的数量的符号。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率与传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率不同。由于,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率大于传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率。由于,该第一帧与该第二帧中均携带了业务信息,即前述第一信息和前述第二信息均为该业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传 输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。Wherein, the time length of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the first information is the same as the time length of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the second information. The number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Because, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
此外,前述第一帧还包括切换信息,该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。In addition, the aforementioned first frame further includes switching information, which is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
可选的,该切换信息可以为该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进。具体与前述表1类似,具体此处不再赘述。Optionally, the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step. The details are similar to the foregoing Table 1, and the details are not repeated here.
可选的,该切换信息可以为前述切换步进。Optionally, the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step.
可选的,该切换信息可以为第二周期,该第二周期与一个该切换步进对应,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长。Optionally, the switching information may be a second period, the second period corresponding to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth.
可选的,该切换信息可以包括该第二信息的符号数。Optionally, the switching information may include the number of symbols of the second information.
可选的,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。具体地,与前文类似,具体此处不再赘述。Optionally, the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
下面再对接收端的主要结构进行介绍:The main structure of the receiving end will be introduced below:
当该接收端执行增大符号带宽的功能时,如图1F所示,该接收端11包括接收模块111和处理模块112。其中,该接收模块111,用于采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务信息,该业务信息位于第一帧中。此外,该接收模块111,还用于采用第二符号带宽从该发送端接收该业务信息和冗余信息。其中,该业务信息和该冗余信息位于第二帧中。并且,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。When the receiving end performs the function of increasing the symbol bandwidth, as shown in FIG. 1F, the receiving end 11 includes a receiving module 111 and a processing module 112. Wherein, the receiving module 111 is configured to receive service information from the sending end using the first symbol bandwidth, and the service information is located in the first frame. In addition, the receiving module 111 is also configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the service information and redundant information from the sending end. Wherein, the service information and the redundant information are located in the second frame. In addition, the duration of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
应当理解的是,本实施方式中,前述第一符号带宽小于前述第二符号带宽。It should be understood that, in this embodiment, the foregoing first symbol bandwidth is smaller than the foregoing second symbol bandwidth.
其中,由于,采用该第一符号带宽传输该业务信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务信息和该冗余信息的时长相同。又由于,该第一帧仅携带了业务信息,该第二帧除了携带该业务信息之外,还携带了冗余信息。因此,该发送端需要在传输第一帧的时间内传输更多的信息,因此,可以确定该发送端传输该第一帧的速率小于该发送端传输该第二帧的速率。由于,该发送端在传输的第一帧和第二帧中均携带了业务信息,该业务信息为同一业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。Wherein, because the time length of using the first symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information is the same as the time length of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information. Also, because the first frame only carries service information, the second frame also carries redundant information in addition to the service information. Therefore, the sender needs to transmit more information within the time of transmitting the first frame, and therefore, it can be determined that the rate at which the sender transmits the first frame is lower than the rate at which the sender transmits the second frame. Since the sending end carries service information in both the first frame and the second frame of transmission, the service information is information of the same service. Therefore, the sending end is in the process of switching the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The transmission of the service information is always maintained in the middle, therefore, the data message delay will not increase, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
此外,前述处理模块112,用于从前述第一帧提取该切换信息,并根据该切换步进调整采样频率,该采样频率的倒数为该第二周期。其中,前述第一帧还包括切换信息,该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。具体地,该切换信息包括如下任意一项:该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;或者,该切换步进;或者,第二周期,该第二周期与一个该切换步进对应,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;或者,携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数。此外,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。具体地,与前文中发送端执行增大符号带宽的功能时的切换信息相同,具体此处不再赘述。In addition, the aforementioned processing module 112 is configured to extract the switching information from the aforementioned first frame, and adjust the sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period. Wherein, the aforementioned first frame further includes switching information, and the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth. Specifically, the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second period, the second period Corresponding to one switching step, the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information. In addition, the switching information also includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is the same as the switching information when the transmitting end performs the function of increasing the symbol bandwidth in the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
具体地,图1F中的接收端11中的接收模块111可以为后文图3A中的第二收发模块 304,该处理模块112可以为后文图3A中的第二切换控制器301、符号带宽同步环302、切换信息提取模块303。具体地,请参见后文图3A中的相关介绍。Specifically, the receiving module 111 in the receiving end 11 in FIG. 1F may be the second transceiving module 304 in FIG. 3A below, and the processing module 112 may be the second switching controller 301 and the symbol bandwidth in FIG. 3A below. Synchronization ring 302, switching information extraction module 303. Specifically, please refer to the related introduction in Figure 3A below.
当该接收端执行减小符号带宽的功能时,如图1G所示,该接收端11包括接收模块111和处理模块112。其中,该接收模块111,用于采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务的第一信息,该第一信息位于第一帧中。此外,该接收模块111,还用于采用第二符号带宽从该发送端接收该业务的第二信息,该第二信息位于第二帧中。此外,采用该第一符号带宽传输该第一信息的时长与采用该第二符号带宽传输该第二信息的时长相同,并且,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。When the receiving end performs the function of reducing the symbol bandwidth, as shown in FIG. 1G, the receiving end 11 includes a receiving module 111 and a processing module 112. Wherein, the receiving module 111 is configured to receive the first information of the service from the transmitting end by using the first symbol bandwidth, and the first information is located in the first frame. In addition, the receiving module 111 is further configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive second information of the service from the sending end, and the second information is located in the second frame. In addition, the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the second information. The number of symbols carrying the second information in the frame.
应当理解的是,本实施方式中,前述第一符号带宽大于前述第二符号带宽。It should be understood that, in this embodiment, the foregoing first symbol bandwidth is greater than the foregoing second symbol bandwidth.
由于,在相同的时间中,该第一帧与该第二帧分别传输了不同的数量的符号。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率与传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率不同。由于,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率大于传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率。由于,该第一帧与该第二帧中均携带了业务信息,即前述第一信息和前述第二信息均为该业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。Because, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
此外,前述处理模块112,用于从前述第一帧提取该切换信息,并根据该切换步进调整采样频率,该采样频率的倒数为该第二周期。其中,前述第一帧还包括切换信息,该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。具体地,该切换信息包括如下任意一项:该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;或者,该切换步进;或者,第二周期,该第二周期与一个该切换步进对应,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;或者,携带该第二信息的符号数。此外,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。具体地,与前文中发送端执行减小符号带宽的功能时的切换信息相同,具体此处不再赘述。In addition, the aforementioned processing module 112 is configured to extract the switching information from the aforementioned first frame, and adjust the sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period. Wherein, the aforementioned first frame further includes switching information, and the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth. Specifically, the switching information includes any one of the following: the identification of the switching step, the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step; or, the switching step; or, the second period, the second period Corresponding to one switching step, the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth; or, the number of symbols carrying the second information. In addition, the switching information also includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is the same as the switching information when the transmitting end performs the function of reducing the symbol bandwidth in the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
上面对发送端和接收端的主要结构进行了介绍,下面分别对前述发送端和前述接收端分别进行进一步的介绍:The main structures of the sending end and the receiving end are introduced above, and the foregoing sending end and the foregoing receiving end are respectively further introduced below:
如图2A所示,当发送端执行增大符号带宽的功能时,该发送端20包括第一切换控制器201、切换信息接收模块202、符号带宽适配模块203、符号带宽使能模块204以及第一收发模块205。其中,第一切换控制器201分别与切换信息接收模块202和符号带宽使能模块204连接,符号带宽适配模块203分别与切换信息接收模块202和符号带宽使能模块204连接。As shown in FIG. 2A, when the sending end performs the function of increasing the symbol bandwidth, the sending end 20 includes a first switching controller 201, a switching information receiving module 202, a symbol bandwidth adapting module 203, a symbol bandwidth enabling module 204, and The first transceiver module 205. The first switching controller 201 is connected to the switching information receiving module 202 and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 respectively, and the symbol bandwidth adapting module 203 is connected to the switching information receiving module 202 and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 respectively.
该第一切换控制器204,用于向该切换信息接收模块202发送切换信息。其中,该切换信息用于指示将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽。具体地,该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。The first switching controller 204 is configured to send switching information to the switching information receiving module 202. Wherein, the switching information is used to instruct to switch the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. Specifically, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
可选的,该切换信息可以为该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进。当该发送端将该切换步进的标识发送至该接收端时,该接收端可以通过查找该接收端内部的切换步进的标识与切换步进的对应关系表获知该切换步进。Optionally, the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step. When the sending end sends the identification of the switching step to the receiving end, the receiving end can learn the switching step by looking up the table of correspondence between the identification of the switching step and the switching step inside the receiving end.
可选的,该切换信息可以为前述切换步进。Optionally, the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step.
可选的,该切换信息可以为第二周期,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长,该第二周期的倒数为该第二符号带宽。Optionally, the switching information may be a second period, where the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth, and the reciprocal of the second period is the second symbol bandwidth.
可选的,该切换信息可以包括携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数。Optionally, the switching information may include the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
可选的,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。具体地,前文已做详细介绍,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, the previous article has been introduced in detail, and will not be repeated here.
应当理解的是,前述切换步进的标识、切换步进、第二周期以及携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数之间存在对应关系,当该接收端获知前述任意一项时,该接收端可以计算出其他项。例如,当将50MHz的带宽降低至30MHz时,该切换步进可以为2MHz,切换次数为10次。在执行第一次切换时,即当该符号带宽从50MHz切换至48MHz时,该第二周期为1/48us。还应理解的是,若该切换次数为多次,则每次切换的步进可以不同。具体地,该切换信息中包含多种切换步进、每种切换步各自对应切换次数,以及每种切换步进的采用次序。例如,当将50MHz的带宽降低至30MHz时,该切换步进分别设置为2MHz和1MHz,并设置2MHz对应的切换次数为5次,1MHz对应的切换次数为10次,以及切换次序为先按照2MHz切换5次,再按照1MHz切换10次。具体地,可以根据实际应用需求进行调整,具体此处不再赘述。It should be understood that there is a correspondence between the aforementioned handover step identification, handover step, second period, and the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information. When the receiving end knows any one of the foregoing When the item is selected, the receiving end can calculate other items. For example, when the bandwidth of 50 MHz is reduced to 30 MHz, the switching step may be 2 MHz, and the number of switching times may be 10 times. When the first handover is performed, that is, when the symbol bandwidth is switched from 50MHz to 48MHz, the second period is 1/48us. It should also be understood that if the number of switching times is multiple times, the step of each switching may be different. Specifically, the switching information includes a variety of switching steps, the number of switching times each switching step corresponds to, and the order in which each switching step is adopted. For example, when the bandwidth of 50MHz is reduced to 30MHz, the switching step is set to 2MHz and 1MHz respectively, and the number of switching times corresponding to 2MHz is set to 5 times, the number of switching times corresponding to 1MHz is 10 times, and the switching sequence is first according to 2MHz Switch 5 times, and then switch 10 times according to 1MHz. Specifically, it can be adjusted according to actual application requirements, and the details will not be repeated here.
还应理解的是,该切换信息可以在生产制造该发送端20时就写入该第一切换控制器201中,该切换信息也可以在用户使用该发送端20时通过软件导入该第一切换控制器201中,具体此处不做限定。该切换信息在实际应用中的具体形态将在后文图2D和图2E对应的实施例中进行详细介绍,具体此处不再赘述。It should also be understood that the switching information can be written into the first switching controller 201 when the sending terminal 20 is manufactured, and the switching information can also be imported into the first switching controller 201 through software when the user uses the sending terminal 20. In the controller 201, there is no specific limitation here. The specific form of the switching information in the actual application will be described in detail in the embodiments corresponding to FIG. 2D and FIG. 2E later, and the details will not be repeated here.
此外,该第一切换控制器201,还用于向该符号带宽使能模块204发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息根据前述切换信息生成,该第一指示信息用于向该符号带宽使能模块204指示该第二周期,以使得该符号带宽使能模块204根据该第二周期确定第一使能信号。In addition, the first switching controller 201 is further configured to send first indication information to the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204, the first indication information is generated according to the foregoing switching information, and the first indication information is used to enable the symbol bandwidth The enabling module 204 indicates the second period, so that the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 determines the first enabling signal according to the second period.
该切换信息接收模块202,用于从信源(图未示)接收业务信息以及从第一切换控制器201接收该切换信息,并采用该业务信息和该切换信息配置第一帧,该第一帧携带前述切换信息和前述业务信息。此外,该切换信息接收模块202,还用于向该符号带宽适配模块203发送该第一帧,以使得该符号带宽适配模块203采用第一符号带宽对应的频率输出该第一帧至第一收发模块205。The handover information receiving module 202 is configured to receive service information from a source (not shown) and the handover information from the first handover controller 201, and use the service information and the handover information to configure the first frame. The frame carries the aforementioned switching information and the aforementioned service information. In addition, the switching information receiving module 202 is also configured to send the first frame to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, so that the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 uses the frequency corresponding to the first symbol bandwidth to output the first frame to the first frame. A transceiver module 205.
该第一收发模块205,用于采用该第一符号带宽向接收端发送该第一帧。由于该第一帧中携带该切换信息,因此,该发送端可以提前通知该接收端根据切换信息将该第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽,又由于该第一帧中还携带了业务信息,因此,可以在向该接收端通知切换信息的同时传输业务信息,以保证业务传输不中断。The first transceiver module 205 is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to send the first frame to the receiving end. Since the switching information is carried in the first frame, the sending end can notify the receiving end in advance to switch the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information, and because the first frame also carries service information Therefore, the service information can be transmitted while notifying the receiving end of the switching information to ensure uninterrupted service transmission.
该符号带宽使能模块204,用于根据该第一切换控制器201发送的第一指示信息确定 第一使能信号,并向该符号带宽适配模块203发送该第一使能信号,该第一使能信号用于按照该第一指示信息所携带的第二周期使能该符号带宽适配模块203。具体地,该第一使能信号可以为连续的脉冲波,每隔一个第二周期的时长产生一个脉冲,当该脉冲波的某一个脉冲传输至该符号带宽适配模块203时,该符号带宽适配模块203便可以输出一个符号。当该脉冲波持续作用于该符号带宽适配模块203时,该符号带宽适配模块203便可以按照该第二周期输出连续的符号。The symbol bandwidth enable module 204 is configured to determine the first enable signal according to the first indication information sent by the first switching controller 201, and send the first enable signal to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, the second An enable signal is used to enable the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 according to the second period carried in the first indication information. Specifically, the first enable signal may be a continuous pulse wave, and a pulse is generated every second period of time. When a certain pulse of the pulse wave is transmitted to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, the symbol bandwidth The adaptation module 203 can output a symbol. When the pulse wave continues to act on the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 can output consecutive symbols according to the second period.
该符号带宽适配模块203,用于在该前述业务信息的末尾配置冗余信息得到第二帧,并在该第一使能信号的使能作用下输出该第二帧。由于,本实施例中的第二帧由多个连续的符号组成。因此,当该脉冲波持续作用于该符号带宽适配模块203时,可以按照该第二周期输出该第二帧。The symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 is configured to configure redundant information at the end of the aforementioned service information to obtain a second frame, and output the second frame under the enable action of the first enable signal. Because, the second frame in this embodiment is composed of multiple consecutive symbols. Therefore, when the pulse wave continues to act on the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203, the second frame can be output according to the second cycle.
该第一收发模块205,用于采用该第二符号带宽向接收端发送该第二帧。The first transceiver module 205 is configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end.
本实施例中,由于发送端中的符号带宽适配模块可以在第一使能信号的使能作用下按照第二符号带宽对应的频率输出第二帧,并将该携带了冗余信息和业务信息的第二帧发送给接收端,因此,该发送端不仅可以将发送该第二帧的带宽调整为第二符号带宽,还可以在采用该第二符号带宽发送第二帧时保证业务的持续进行。In this embodiment, because the symbol bandwidth adaptation module in the transmitting end can output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second symbol bandwidth under the enablement of the first enable signal, and carry redundant information and services. The second frame of information is sent to the receiving end. Therefore, the sending end can not only adjust the bandwidth for sending the second frame to the second symbol bandwidth, but also ensure the continuity of the service when the second frame is sent using the second symbol bandwidth. get on.
可选的,该第一收发模块205,还用于从接收端接收确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该接收端已接收该切换信息。进一步地,该确认信息可以用于指示该接收端从第一帧中获取到该切换信息。Optionally, the first transceiver module 205 is further configured to receive confirmation information from the receiving end, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end has received the handover information. Further, the confirmation information may be used to instruct the receiving end to obtain the handover information from the first frame.
可选的,该第一收发模块205,还用于从接收端接收传输信号质量信息,该传输信号质量信息用于指示该接收端采用该第二符号带宽接收该第二帧的信号质量。在这样的实施方式中,该发送端可以根据该传输质量信息的优劣确定是否需要继续调整符号带宽。具体地,该传输质量信息可以为均方误差(mean squard error,MSE)或信噪比(signal-to-noise ratio,SNR),具体此处不做限定。Optionally, the first transceiver module 205 is further configured to receive transmission signal quality information from the receiving end, where the transmission signal quality information is used to instruct the receiving end to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the signal quality of the second frame. In such an implementation, the sending end may determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Specifically, the transmission quality information may be mean square error (MSE) or signal-to-noise ratio (signal-to-noise ratio, SNR), which is not specifically limited here.
进一步地,该第一收发模块205,还用于向该第一切换控制器201发送该传输质量信息,以使得该第一切换控制器201根据该传输质量信息的优劣确定是否需要继续调整符号带宽。当该传输质量信息满足预设条件时,该发送端20可以再次执行切换符号带宽的操作。具体地,与前述内容类似,具体此处不再赘述。Further, the first transceiver module 205 is further configured to send the transmission quality information to the first handover controller 201, so that the first handover controller 201 determines whether to continue to adjust the symbols according to the quality of the transmission quality information. bandwidth. When the transmission quality information satisfies the preset condition, the sending end 20 may perform the operation of switching the symbol bandwidth again. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing content, and details are not repeated here.
本实施方式中,该发送端20可以根据接收端接收该第二帧的质量决策是否需要继续调整该符号带宽。因此,该发送端20可以在保证信息传输质量的同时使得该符号带宽能够逐渐平稳切换,进而可以避免符号带宽不稳定而影响用户的业务体验。In this embodiment, the sending end 20 may decide whether to continue adjusting the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the second frame received by the receiving end. Therefore, the sending end 20 can enable the symbol bandwidth to gradually and smoothly switch while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the unstable symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
前面对该发送端20的主要结构进行了介绍,下面将结合前述图2A所示的发送端20,进一步对该发送端20内部的各个模块的具体结构进行介绍。The main structure of the sending end 20 has been introduced above, and the specific structure of each module inside the sending end 20 will be further introduced in conjunction with the sending end 20 shown in FIG. 2A.
具体地,符号带宽适配模块203,用于调整一帧中每个符号的传输速率,并在帧的末尾配置冗余信息,以保证传输第一帧与传输第二帧所使用的时长相同。更具体地,该符号带宽适配模块203可以包括先入先出模块FIFO和选择器;或者,该符号带宽适配模块203可以包括随机存取存储器RAM。Specifically, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 is configured to adjust the transmission rate of each symbol in a frame, and configure redundant information at the end of the frame to ensure that the transmission time of the first frame and the transmission of the second frame are the same. More specifically, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may include a first-in-first-out module FIFO and a selector; or, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may include a random access memory RAM.
在一种可选的实施方式中,如图2B所示,该符号带宽适配模块203包括先入先出模块FIFO 2031和选择器2032。其中,该FIFO指先进入则先执行的按序执行方式。该FIFO 2031,用于缓存组成该第一帧的各个符号,并将该第一帧输入至该选择器2032,即将该第一帧中的各个符号按照进入该FIFO 2031的顺序输入至该选择器2032。以使得该FIFO 2031为选择器2032留出间隙以完成速率适配并插入冗余符号。In an optional implementation manner, as shown in FIG. 2B, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 includes a first-in first-out module FIFO 2031 and a selector 2032. Among them, the FIFO refers to the sequential execution mode that first enters and executes first. The FIFO 2031 is used to buffer the symbols that make up the first frame and input the first frame to the selector 2032, that is, the symbols in the first frame are input to the selector in the order of entering the FIFO 2031 2032. This allows the FIFO 2031 to leave a gap for the selector 2032 to complete rate adaptation and insert redundant symbols.
此外,本实施方式中,该符号带宽使能模块204与前述选择器2032连接,因此,该符号带宽使能模块204产生的第一使能信号可以直接作用于该选择器2032。该选择器2032,用于在该第一使能信号的使能作用下在该业务信息的末尾配置冗余信息得到该第二帧。由于,该第一使能信号是根据该第二周期确定的,因此,该选择器2032在该第一使能信号的使能作用下可以每间隔一个第二周期对应的时长就输出一个符号,此时,该选择器2032输出符号的频率即为该第二符号带宽。当该选择器2032将携带业务信息的符号输出完后,该选择器2032将会在该携带业务信息的符号的末尾配置多个冗余符号,即在该第一帧末尾配置携带冗余信息的符号,以填补因调整每个符号的输出周期而多余的时长。应当理解的是,该选择器2032配置的每个冗余符号的输出时间也为该第二周期对应的时长。具体地,可以参见前述图1C对应的实施例,具体此处不再赘述。In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 is connected to the aforementioned selector 2032. Therefore, the first enable signal generated by the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 can directly act on the selector 2032. The selector 2032 is configured to configure redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame under the enabling action of the first enable signal. Since the first enable signal is determined according to the second period, the selector 2032 can output a symbol every time interval corresponding to the second period under the enable action of the first enable signal, At this time, the frequency of the symbol output by the selector 2032 is the second symbol bandwidth. After the selector 2032 outputs the symbol carrying the service information, the selector 2032 will configure multiple redundant symbols at the end of the symbol carrying the service information, that is, at the end of the first frame. Symbol to fill up the extra time due to adjusting the output period of each symbol. It should be understood that the output time of each redundant symbol configured by the selector 2032 is also the duration corresponding to the second period. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1C, and details are not repeated here.
本实施方式中,由于符号带宽适配模块中的选择器可以在第一使能信号的使能作用下按照第二符号带宽对应的频率输出第二帧,并且,该第二帧中携带了冗余信息,因此,该发送端可以将发送该第二帧的带宽调整为第二符号带宽。又由于选择器输出的第二帧还携带了业务信息,因此,当该发送端在向该接收端传输第二帧时,该接收端不仅可以根据切换信息以带宽调整至第二符号带宽调整,还可以从该第二帧中获取该业务信息以保证业务的持续进行。因此,不仅可以保证业务不中断,而且还可以调整发送端和接收端之间传输业务信息的符号带宽。In this embodiment, because the selector in the symbol bandwidth adaptation module can output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second symbol bandwidth under the enablement of the first enable signal, and the second frame carries redundancy. Therefore, the sending end can adjust the bandwidth for sending the second frame to the second symbol bandwidth. Also, because the second frame output by the selector also carries service information, when the sending end transmits the second frame to the receiving end, the receiving end can not only adjust the bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth adjustment according to the switching information, but also The service information can also be obtained from the second frame to ensure the continuation of the service. Therefore, not only can the service not be interrupted, but also the symbol bandwidth of the service information transmitted between the sender and the receiver can be adjusted.
在另一种可选的实施方式中,如图2C所示,该符号带宽适配模块203包括随机存取存储器RAM 2033。在本实施方式中,该符号带宽使能模块204与前述RAM 2033连接,因此,该符号带宽使能模块204产生的第一使能信号可以直接作用于该RAM 2033。该RAM 2033用于在携带业务信息的符号的末尾配置携带冗余信息的符号得到该第二帧,并在该第一使能信号的使能作用下输出该第二帧。具体地,该RAM 2033在该第一使能信息的使能作用下可以每间隔一个第二周期对应的时长就输出一个符号,此时,该RAM 2033输出符号的频率即为该第二符号带宽。当该RAM 2033将携带业务信息的符号输出完后,由于该RAM 2033内部存储有冗余符号,该RAM 2033将会在该携带业务信息的符号的末尾配置多个冗余符号,即在该携带业务信息的符号末尾配置携带冗余信息的符号,以填补因调整每个符号的输出周期而多余的时长。应当理解的是,该RAM 2033配置的每个冗余符号的输出时间也为该第二周期对应的时长。具体地,可以参见前述图1C对应的实施例,具体此处不再赘述。还应理解的是,该RAM 2033也可以重复读取该第一帧中的符号作为冗余符号,具体此处不做限定。In another optional implementation manner, as shown in FIG. 2C, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 includes a random access memory RAM 2033. In this embodiment, the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 is connected to the aforementioned RAM 2033. Therefore, the first enable signal generated by the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 can directly act on the RAM 2033. The RAM 2033 is used to configure a symbol carrying redundant information at the end of a symbol carrying service information to obtain the second frame, and to output the second frame under the enable action of the first enable signal. Specifically, the RAM 2033 is enabled by the first enable information to output one symbol every time interval corresponding to a second period. At this time, the frequency of the output symbol of the RAM 2033 is the second symbol bandwidth. . After the RAM 2033 has outputted the symbols carrying service information, since the RAM 2033 stores redundant symbols inside, the RAM 2033 will configure multiple redundant symbols at the end of the symbols carrying service information, which means that At the end of the symbol of the service information, a symbol carrying redundant information is configured to fill up the excess time due to the adjustment of the output period of each symbol. It should be understood that the output time of each redundant symbol configured by the RAM 2033 is also the duration corresponding to the second period. Specifically, reference may be made to the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1C, and details are not repeated here. It should also be understood that the RAM 2033 may also repeatedly read the symbols in the first frame as redundant symbols, which is not specifically limited here.
本实施方式中,由于符号带宽适配模块中的RAM 2033可以在第一使能信号的使能作用下按照第二符号带宽对应的频率输出第二帧,并且,该第二帧中携带了冗余信息,因此, 该发送端可以将发送该第二帧的带宽调整为第二符号带宽。又由于RAM 2033输出的第二帧还携带了业务信息,因此,当该发送端在向该接收端传输第二帧时,该接收端不仅可以根据切换信息将符号带宽调整至第二符号带宽调整,还可以从该第二帧中获取该业务信息以保证业务的持续进行。因此,不仅可以保证业务不中断,而且还可以调整发送端和接收端之间传输业务信息的符号带宽。此外,由于该RAM 2033可以将内部存储的冗余符号配置于该携带业务信息的符号的末尾,因此,相比于前述图2B对应的实施方式,可以简化符号带宽适配模块的内部结构。In this embodiment, because the RAM 2033 in the symbol bandwidth adaptation module can output the second frame at the frequency corresponding to the second symbol bandwidth under the enablement of the first enable signal, and the second frame carries redundancy. Therefore, the sending end can adjust the bandwidth for sending the second frame to the second symbol bandwidth. Also, because the second frame output by RAM 2033 also carries service information, when the sender is transmitting the second frame to the receiver, the receiver can not only adjust the symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth adjustment based on the switching information , The service information can also be obtained from the second frame to ensure the continuation of the service. Therefore, not only can the service not be interrupted, but also the symbol bandwidth of the service information transmitted between the sender and the receiver can be adjusted. In addition, since the RAM 2033 can configure the internally stored redundant symbols at the end of the symbols carrying service information, compared with the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2B, the internal structure of the symbol bandwidth adaptation module can be simplified.
进一步地,结合前述图2B所提出的实施方式,该发送端20可以进一步如图2D或图2E所示。Further, in combination with the implementation manner proposed in FIG. 2B, the sending end 20 may be further as shown in FIG. 2D or FIG. 2E.
具体地,该切换信息接收模块202可以将切换信息与业务信息分别采用不同的调制方式进行调制。进一步地,切换信息可以采用低阶调制,有利于该接收端能够快速调并提取该切换信息;该业务信息可以采用高阶调制,以保证业务信息的解调精度,降低业务信息解调失败的几率。Specifically, the handover information receiving module 202 may respectively use different modulation methods to modulate the handover information and the service information. Further, the handover information can be low-level modulation, which is beneficial for the receiving end to quickly adjust and extract the handover information; the service information can be high-level modulation to ensure the demodulation accuracy of the service information, and reduce the failure of the demodulation of the service information. probability.
在一种可选的实施方式中,如图2D所示,该发送端20中的切换信息接收模块202包括调制映射MAP模块2021和组帧模块2022。其中,该组帧模块2022与该第一切换控制器201连接,以使得该组帧模块2022可以接收该第一切换控制器201发送的信息,例如,切换信息等。具体地,该MAP模块2021,用于采用第一调制方式将该业务信息调制为第二调制信息,以便于提升传输效率,以使得在传输一个符号的时长内可以传输多个比特信息。具体地,该第一调制方式可以为正交振幅调制QAM(例如,64QAM或256QAM)或其它高阶调制方式,具体此处不做限定。In an optional implementation manner, as shown in FIG. 2D, the handover information receiving module 202 in the sending end 20 includes a modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and a framing module 2022. Wherein, the framing module 2022 is connected to the first switching controller 201, so that the framing module 2022 can receive information sent by the first switching controller 201, for example, switching information. Specifically, the MAP module 2021 is configured to modulate the service information into the second modulation information by using the first modulation mode, so as to improve transmission efficiency, so that multiple bits of information can be transmitted within the time length of transmitting one symbol. Specifically, the first modulation method may be quadrature amplitude modulation QAM (for example, 64QAM or 256QAM) or other high-order modulation methods, which are not specifically limited here.
此外,该组帧模块2022,用于从该第一切换控制器201接收该切换信息,并采用第二调制方式将该切换信息调制为第三调制信息,以便于提升传输效率,以使得在传输一个符号的时长内可以传输多个比特信息。具体地,该第二调制方式可以BPSK调制或QPSK调制,具体此处不做限定。由于,该切换信息采用的是低阶调制方式而非高阶调制方式,该低阶调制方式的调制和解调都比高阶调制方式容易,因此,可以使该发送端更容易将该切换信息插入该第一帧中,也使得该接收端更容易从该第一帧中解调出该切换信息。In addition, the framing module 2022 is configured to receive the switching information from the first switching controller 201, and use the second modulation method to modulate the switching information into third modulation information, so as to improve the transmission efficiency, so that the Multiple bits of information can be transmitted within the duration of one symbol. Specifically, the second modulation mode may be BPSK modulation or QPSK modulation, which is not specifically limited here. Since the switching information uses a low-order modulation method instead of a high-order modulation method, the modulation and demodulation of the low-order modulation method is easier than that of the high-order modulation method. Therefore, it is easier for the sending end to change the switching information. Inserting into the first frame also makes it easier for the receiving end to demodulate the switching information from the first frame.
该组帧模块2022,还用于对该第二调制信息和该第三调制信息组帧得到该第一帧,并向该符号带宽适配模块203发送该第一帧。其中,该符号带宽适配模块203可以采用前述图2B所示的实施方式或采用前述图2C所示的实施方式,具体此处不做限定。The framing module 2022 is further configured to frame the second modulation information and the third modulation information to obtain the first frame, and send the first frame to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203. Wherein, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 can adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 2B or adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 2C, which is not specifically limited here.
具体地,该第一帧可以如图2D-1所示,该第一帧包括帧头前导码、第三调制信息和第二调制信息。其中,该第三调制信息为由该切换信息经低阶调制而得的多个符号,该第二调制信息为由该业务信息经高阶调制而得的多个符号,该帧头前导码用于帧定位。应当注意的是,组成该帧头前导码的符号个数、组成该第三调制信息的符号个数以及组成该第二调制信息的符号个数可以根据具体应用场景进行调整,具体此处不做限定。Specifically, the first frame may be as shown in FIG. 2D-1, and the first frame includes a frame header preamble, third modulation information, and second modulation information. Wherein, the third modulation information is a plurality of symbols obtained by low-order modulation of the switching information, the second modulation information is a plurality of symbols obtained by high-order modulation of the service information, and the frame header preamble is used for Positioning in the frame. It should be noted that the number of symbols that make up the frame header preamble, the number of symbols that make up the third modulation information, and the number of symbols that make up the second modulation information can be adjusted according to specific application scenarios. limited.
更具体地,该符号带宽适配模块203在携带业务信息的符号的末尾配置冗余信息而获得的第二帧可以如图2D-2所示,该第二帧包括帧头前导码、第三调制信息、第二调制信息 和冗余信息。其中,帧前导码、第三调制信息和第二调制信息与前述图2D-1类似,具体此处不再赘述。该冗余信息为多个冗余符号,该冗余符号个数因切换的符号带宽的大小的不同而有所差异,具体此处不做限定。More specifically, the second frame obtained by configuring redundant information at the end of the symbol carrying service information by the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may be as shown in FIG. 2D-2. The second frame includes the frame header preamble and the third frame. Modulation information, second modulation information, and redundant information. Wherein, the frame preamble, the third modulation information, and the second modulation information are similar to those in FIG. 2D-1, and the details are not repeated here. The redundant information is a plurality of redundant symbols, and the number of redundant symbols varies due to the size of the switched symbol bandwidth, which is not specifically limited here.
此外,该切换信息接收模块202可以将切换信息和业务信息采用同一种调制方式。此时,前述业务信息和前述切换信息均采用高阶调制,相比于采用两种不同的调制方式,有利于在一帧中携带更多比特信息,有利于提高每一帧的传输数据量,进而有利于提高传输效率。In addition, the switching information receiving module 202 may use the same modulation method for the switching information and the service information. At this time, both the aforementioned service information and the aforementioned switching information adopt high-level modulation. Compared with using two different modulation methods, it is beneficial to carry more bits of information in one frame and is beneficial to increase the amount of transmitted data per frame. In turn, it is beneficial to improve the transmission efficiency.
在一另种可选的实施方式中,如图2E所示,该切换信息接收模块202包括调制映射MAP模块2021和组帧模块2022。其中,该MAP模块2021与该第一切换控制器201连接,以使得该MAP模块2021可以接收该第一切换控制器201发送的信息,例如,切换信息等。具体地,该MAP模块2021,用于从该第一切换控制器201接收该切换信息,其中,该切换信息在前文已做详细介绍,具体此处不再赘述。此外,该MAP模块2021还用于采用第一调制方式将该切换信息和该业务信息调制为第一调制信息。更具体地,该MAP模块2021可以将表示该切换信息的比特和表示该业务信息的比特调制为多个符号,以使得采用较少的符号表示较多的比特,进而可以在一个帧中携带更多的信息,以便于提升传输效率。具体地,该第一调制方式可以为正交振幅调制QAM(例如,64QAM或256QAM)或其它高阶调制方式,具体此处不做限定。In an alternative embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2E, the switching information receiving module 202 includes a modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and a framing module 2022. The MAP module 2021 is connected to the first switching controller 201, so that the MAP module 2021 can receive information sent by the first switching controller 201, for example, switching information. Specifically, the MAP module 2021 is configured to receive the switching information from the first switching controller 201, where the switching information has been described in detail in the foregoing, and the details will not be repeated here. In addition, the MAP module 2021 is also used to modulate the switching information and the service information into first modulation information using the first modulation mode. More specifically, the MAP module 2021 can modulate the bits representing the switching information and the bits representing the service information into multiple symbols, so that fewer symbols are used to represent more bits, and more bits can be carried in one frame. More information in order to improve transmission efficiency. Specifically, the first modulation method may be quadrature amplitude modulation QAM (for example, 64QAM or 256QAM) or other high-order modulation methods, which are not specifically limited here.
此外,该组帧模块2022,用于对前述第一调制信息组帧得到该第一帧,并向该符号带宽适配模块203发送该第一帧。其中,该符号带宽适配模块203可以采用前述图2B所示的实施方式或采用前述图2C所示的实施方式,具体此处不做限定。In addition, the framing module 2022 is configured to frame the aforementioned first modulation information to obtain the first frame, and send the first frame to the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203. Wherein, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 can adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 2B or adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 2C, which is not specifically limited here.
具体地,该第一帧可以如图2E-1所示,该第一帧包括字节头使能和第一调制信息。其中,该第一调制信息为由该切换信息和业务信息经高阶调制而得的多个符号。该字节头使能用于净荷字节定位,以使得该接收端收到该第一帧时,可以获知读取该第一调制信息的具体位置。应当注意的是,组成该第一调制信息的符号个数可以根据具体应用场景进行调整,具体此处不做限定。Specifically, the first frame may be as shown in FIG. 2E-1, and the first frame includes byte header enable and first modulation information. Wherein, the first modulation information is a plurality of symbols obtained by high-order modulation of the switching information and service information. The byte header enable is used for payload byte positioning, so that when the receiving end receives the first frame, it can know the specific position where the first modulation information is read. It should be noted that the number of symbols constituting the first modulation information can be adjusted according to specific application scenarios, which is not specifically limited here.
更具体地,该符号带宽适配模块203在第一帧的末尾配置冗余信息而获得的第二帧可以如图2E-2所示,该第二帧包括字节头使能、第一调制信息和冗余信息。其中,字节头使能和第一调制信息与前述图2E-1类似,具体此处不再赘述。该冗余信息为多个冗余符号,该冗余符号个数因切换的符号带宽的大小的不同而有所差异,具体此处不做限定。More specifically, the second frame obtained by configuring the redundant information at the end of the first frame by the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may be as shown in FIG. 2E-2. The second frame includes byte header enable, first modulation Information and redundant information. Among them, the byte header enable and the first modulation information are similar to those in FIG. 2E-1, and the details are not repeated here. The redundant information is a plurality of redundant symbols, and the number of redundant symbols varies due to the size of the switched symbol bandwidth, which is not specifically limited here.
本实施例中,无论该切换信息接收模块202采用前述图2D对应的实施方式或者图2E对应的实施方式,该切换信息接收模块202均可以接收切换信息和业务信息以进一步经调制等一系列处理组成第一帧。有利于将该切换信息和该业务信息准确高效地装载于该第一帧中,降低接收端接收的切换信息和业务信息的出错几率。In this embodiment, no matter the switching information receiving module 202 adopts the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2D or the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2E, the switching information receiving module 202 can receive the switching information and service information for further processing such as modulation. Make up the first frame. It is beneficial to load the switching information and the service information in the first frame accurately and efficiently, and reduce the error probability of the switching information and the service information received by the receiving end.
此外,还应理解的是,本实施方式所提出的切换信息接收模块202的具体实现方式可以与前述图2C所提出的实施方式相结合,即本实施方式中的调制映射MAP模块2021和组帧模块2022可以替换图2C中的切换信息接收模块202。具体地,与前述图2D和图2E对 应的实施方式类似,具体此处不再赘述。In addition, it should also be understood that the specific implementation of the handover information receiving module 202 proposed in this embodiment can be combined with the implementation shown in FIG. 2C, that is, the modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and framing in this embodiment The module 2022 can replace the switching information receiving module 202 in FIG. 2C. Specifically, it is similar to the implementation manner corresponding to the foregoing Fig. 2D and Fig. 2E, and details are not repeated here.
进一步地,结合前述图2D所提出的实施方式,该发送端20可以进一步如图2F所示。此时,该发送端20还包括滤波装置206,该滤波装置206用于调整携带该第二帧的信号的波形。具体地,该滤波装置206可以为根升余弦滤波器2061,也可以为差值滤波器2062,具体此处不做限定。当仅采用根升余弦滤波器2061作为滤波装置206时,该根升余弦滤波器2061用于使发送频谱成型,接收匹配滤波,减少码间串扰ISI。当仅采用差值滤波器2062作为滤波装置206时,该差值滤波器2062用于完成发送符号频率到数字模拟转换器(digital to analog converter,DAC)采样频率的插值,隔离镜像。Further, in combination with the implementation manner proposed in FIG. 2D, the sending end 20 may be further as shown in FIG. 2F. At this time, the sending end 20 further includes a filtering device 206, and the filtering device 206 is used to adjust the waveform of the signal carrying the second frame. Specifically, the filtering device 206 may be a root raised cosine filter 2061 or a difference filter 2062, which is not specifically limited here. When only the root raised cosine filter 2061 is used as the filtering device 206, the root raised cosine filter 2061 is used to shape the transmission spectrum, receive matched filtering, and reduce the inter-symbol crosstalk ISI. When only the difference filter 2062 is used as the filtering device 206, the difference filter 2062 is used to complete the interpolation of the transmitted symbol frequency to the sampling frequency of a digital to analog converter (DAC) to isolate the image.
在实际应用中,为了保证携带该第二帧的信号的波形更利于该接收端解调,可以将根升余弦滤波器2061和差值滤波器2062作为滤波装置206。更具体地,如图2F所示,可以将携带该第二帧的信息先经根升余弦滤波器2061滤波,再经差值滤波器2062滤波。In practical applications, in order to ensure that the waveform of the signal carrying the second frame is more conducive to demodulation at the receiving end, the root raised cosine filter 2061 and the difference filter 2062 may be used as the filtering device 206. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2F, the information carrying the second frame may be filtered by the root raised cosine filter 2061, and then filtered by the difference filter 2062.
此外,还应理解的是,本实施方式所提出的滤波装置206的具体实现方式可以与前述图2E所提出的实施方式相结合,具体此处不再赘述。In addition, it should also be understood that the specific implementation manner of the filtering device 206 proposed in this implementation manner can be combined with the implementation manner proposed in the foregoing FIG. 2E, and details are not described herein again.
此外,当发送端执行减小符号带宽的功能时,该发送端的内部结构与前述图2A类似,但是,其中的各个模块的功能存在些许差异。In addition, when the transmitting end performs the function of reducing the symbol bandwidth, the internal structure of the transmitting end is similar to that of FIG. 2A, but there are some differences in the functions of the various modules therein.
其中,该发送端20包括第一切换控制器201、切换信息接收模块202、符号带宽适配模块203、符号带宽使能模块204以及第一收发模块205。其中,第一切换控制器201分别与切换信息接收模块202和符号带宽使能模块204连接,符号带宽适配模块203分别与切换信息接收模块202和符号带宽使能模块204连接。The sending end 20 includes a first switching controller 201, a switching information receiving module 202, a symbol bandwidth adapting module 203, a symbol bandwidth enabling module 204, and a first transceiver module 205. The first switching controller 201 is connected to the switching information receiving module 202 and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 respectively, and the symbol bandwidth adapting module 203 is connected to the switching information receiving module 202 and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 respectively.
其中,该第一切换控制器201、切换信息接收模块202、以及该符号带宽使能模块204的功能与前述发送端执行增大符号带宽时的功能类似,具体请参阅前文中的相关描述。Among them, the functions of the first switching controller 201, the switching information receiving module 202, and the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204 are similar to those of the aforementioned transmitting end when the symbol bandwidth is increased. For details, please refer to the relevant description in the foregoing.
该第一收发模块205,用于采用该第一符号带宽向接收端发送第一帧,该第一帧中包括多个携带业务的第一信息的符号数。The first transceiver module 205 is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to send a first frame to the receiving end, and the first frame includes the number of symbols that carry the first information of the service.
此外,该符号带宽适配模块203,用于在符号带宽使能模块204发出的使能信号的使能作用下按照第二周期对应的频率输出携带业务的第二信息的第二帧。其中,该第二帧中的携带业务的第二信息的符号数小于第一帧中携带业务的第一信息的符号。In addition, the symbol bandwidth adapting module 203 is configured to output the second frame carrying the second information of the service according to the frequency corresponding to the second cycle under the enablement of the enable signal sent by the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204. Wherein, the number of symbols carrying the second information of the service in the second frame is less than the number of symbols carrying the first information of the service in the first frame.
该第一收发模块205,用于采用该第二符号带宽向接收端发送该第二帧。The first transceiver module 205 is configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end.
本实施例中,采用第一符号带宽传输该第一信息的时长与采用第二符号带宽传输该第二信息的时长相同。该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。由于,在相同的时间中,该第一帧与该第二帧分别传输了不同的数量的符号。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率与传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率不同。由于,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率大于传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率。由于,该第一帧与该第二帧中均携带了业务信息,即前述第一信息和前述第二信息均为该业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的 信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In this embodiment, the duration of transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth. The number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Because, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
此外,该第一收发模块205的其他功能与前文类似,具体此处不再赘述。In addition, other functions of the first transceiver module 205 are similar to the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
进一步地,符号带宽适配模块203,用于调整一帧中每个符号的传输速率。更具体地,该符号带宽适配模块203可以包括先入先出模块FIFO和选择器;或者,该符号带宽适配模块203可以包括随机存取存储器RAM。Further, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 is used to adjust the transmission rate of each symbol in a frame. More specifically, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may include a first-in-first-out module FIFO and a selector; or, the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 may include a random access memory RAM.
当该符号带宽适配模块203包括先入先出模块FIFO和选择器时,如图2B所示,该FIFO2031,用于缓存组成该第一帧的各个符号,并将该第一帧输入至该选择器2032,即将该第一帧中的各个符号按照进入该FIFO 2031的顺序输入至该选择器2032。该选择器2032在该符号带宽使能模块204产生的第二使能信号的作用下按照第二符号带宽的第二周期对应的频率输出携带业务的第二信息的符号。具体地,请参见前文图2B中的相关描述,此处不再赘述。When the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 includes a first-in-first-out module FIFO and a selector, as shown in FIG. 2B, the FIFO 2031 is used to buffer the symbols that make up the first frame and input the first frame to the selection. The device 2032, that is, the symbols in the first frame are input to the selector 2032 in the order in which they enter the FIFO 2031. The selector 2032 outputs the symbol carrying the second information of the service according to the frequency corresponding to the second period of the second symbol bandwidth under the action of the second enable signal generated by the symbol bandwidth enabling module 204. Specifically, please refer to the related description in Figure 2B above, which will not be repeated here.
当该符号带宽适配模块203包括随机存取存储器RAM时,如图2C所示,该符号带宽使能模块204与前述RAM 2033连接,该符号带宽使能模块204产生的第二使能信号直接作用于该RAM 2033。该RAM 2033用于在该第二使能信号的作用下按照第二符号带宽的第二周期对应的频率输出第二帧,即输出携带业务的第二信息的符号。具体地,请参见前文图2B中的相关描述,此处不再赘述。When the symbol bandwidth adaptation module 203 includes a random access memory RAM, as shown in FIG. 2C, the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 is connected to the aforementioned RAM 2033, and the second enable signal generated by the symbol bandwidth enable module 204 directly Act on the RAM 2033. The RAM 2033 is used to output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second period of the second symbol bandwidth under the action of the second enable signal, that is, to output the symbol carrying the second information of the service. Specifically, please refer to the related description in Figure 2B above, which will not be repeated here.
此外,前述切换信息接收模块202可以包括调制映射MAP模块2021和组帧模块2022。其中,该调制映射MAP模块2021的功能和组帧模块2022的功能与前文图2D和图2E对应的实施例中的功能类似,具体此处不再赘述。In addition, the aforementioned switching information receiving module 202 may include a modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and a framing module 2022. Wherein, the function of the modulation mapping MAP module 2021 and the function of the framing module 2022 are similar to the functions in the previous embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2D and FIG. 2E, and the details are not repeated here.
此外,该发送端20还包括滤波装置206,该滤波装置206用于调整携带该第二帧的信号的波形。具体地,该滤波装置206可以为根升余弦滤波器2061,也可以为差值滤波器2062。具体地,与前文图2F对应的实施例中的功能类似,具体此处不再赘述。In addition, the sending end 20 further includes a filtering device 206, which is used to adjust the waveform of the signal carrying the second frame. Specifically, the filtering device 206 may be a root raised cosine filter 2061 or a difference filter 2062. Specifically, the functions in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2F are similar, and the details are not repeated here.
上面对发送端的结构进行了介绍,下面对该接收端的主要结构进行进一步的介绍:The structure of the sending end is introduced above, and the main structure of the receiving end is further introduced below:
如图3A所示,该接收端30包括第二切换控制器301、符号带宽同步环302、切换信息提取模块303以及第二收发模块304。其中,第二切换控制器301分别与符号带宽同步环302和切换信息提取模块303连接,该符号带宽同步环302与切换信息提取模块303连接。As shown in FIG. 3A, the receiving end 30 includes a second switching controller 301, a symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, a switching information extraction module 303, and a second transceiver module 304. The second switching controller 301 is connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 and the switching information extraction module 303 respectively, and the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 is connected to the switching information extraction module 303.
具体地,该第二收发模块304,用于采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收第一帧,该第一帧携带切换信息和业务信息,该切换信息用于指示将该第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽,该切换信息包括第二周期,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长。具体地,该切换信息的介绍可以参见前述图2A对应的实施例中的相关描述,具体此处不再赘述。Specifically, the second transceiver module 304 is configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to receive a first frame from the sending end, the first frame carries switching information and service information, and the switching information is used to instruct to switch the first symbol bandwidth to The second symbol bandwidth, the switching information includes a second period, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth. Specifically, for the introduction of the switching information, reference may be made to the related description in the embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2A, and details are not repeated here.
该切换信息提取模块303,用于从该第一帧中提取该切换信息,并向该第二切换控制器301发送该切换信息。The switching information extraction module 303 is configured to extract the switching information from the first frame and send the switching information to the second switching controller 301.
该第二切换控制器301,用于根据该切换信息确定第二指示信息,并向该符号带宽同步环302发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该第二周期。The second switching controller 301 is configured to determine second indication information according to the switching information, and send the second indication information to the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, where the second indication information is used to indicate the second period.
该符号带宽同步环302,用于根据该第二指示信息将周期调整为该第二周期。The symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 is configured to adjust the period to the second period according to the second indication information.
该第二收发模块304,还用于采用该第二符号带宽从该发送端接收第二帧,该第二帧 携带该切换信息、该业务信息和冗余信息;The second transceiver module 304 is further configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive a second frame from the transmitting end, where the second frame carries the switching information, the service information, and redundancy information;
该切换信息提取模块303,还用于从该第二帧中提取该业务信息,以使得该第二收发模块304将该业务信息发送至信宿(图未示)。The handover information extraction module 303 is also used to extract the service information from the second frame, so that the second transceiver module 304 sends the service information to the sink (not shown).
本实施例中,由于该接收端可以通过第二收发模块304接收第一帧,并通过该切换信息提取模块303从该第一帧中获取切换信息以将第一符号带宽调整至第二符号带宽,因此,该接收端可以为采用第二符号带宽接收该发送端后续发送的帧结构做准备。此外,当该发送端向该接收端发送第二帧时,该接收端不仅可以直接采用第二符号带宽接收该第二帧,还可以从该第二帧中获取该业务信息以保证业务的持续进行。因此,可以保证发送端和接收端之间传输信息的同步性。In this embodiment, because the receiving end can receive the first frame through the second transceiving module 304, and obtain the switching information from the first frame through the switching information extraction module 303 to adjust the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth Therefore, the receiving end can prepare for receiving the frame structure subsequently sent by the sending end using the second symbol bandwidth. In addition, when the sending end sends the second frame to the receiving end, the receiving end can not only directly use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame, but also obtain the service information from the second frame to ensure the continuity of the service. get on. Therefore, the synchronization of the transmission information between the sender and the receiver can be guaranteed.
可选的,该第二切换控制器301,还用于指示该第二收发模块304向该发送端发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该接收端30已接收该切换信息。进一步地,该确认信息可以用于指示该接收端从第一帧中获取到该切换信息。Optionally, the second switching controller 301 is further configured to instruct the second transceiver module 304 to send confirmation information to the sending end, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the receiving end 30 has received the switching information. Further, the confirmation information may be used to instruct the receiving end to obtain the handover information from the first frame.
可选的,该第二切换控制器301,还用于指示该第二收发模块304向该发送端发送传输质量信息,该传输质量信息用于指示该接收端30采用该第二符号带宽接收该第二帧的质量,以使得该发送端根据该传输质量信息的优劣确定是否需要继续调整符号带宽。其中,该传输质量信息可以为均方误差MSE或信噪比SNR,具体请参见前文中关于传输质量信息的相关介绍,具体此处不再赘述。Optionally, the second switching controller 301 is further configured to instruct the second transceiver module 304 to send transmission quality information to the sending end, and the transmission quality information is used to instruct the receiving end 30 to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the The quality of the second frame, so that the sender determines whether it needs to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. Among them, the transmission quality information may be mean square error MSE or signal-to-noise ratio SNR. For details, please refer to the relevant introduction about transmission quality information in the preceding text, and details are not repeated here.
当该传输质量信息满足预设条件,且该发送端再次执行切换符号带宽的操作时,该接收端30也将执行调整符号带宽的操作。具体地,与前述内容类似,具体此处不再赘述。When the transmission quality information satisfies the preset condition and the sending end performs the operation of switching the symbol bandwidth again, the receiving end 30 will also perform the operation of adjusting the symbol bandwidth. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing content, and details are not repeated here.
本实施方式中,由于发送端可以根据接收端30接收该第二帧的质量决策是否需要继续调整该符号带宽。因此,当该发送端确定需要继续调整符号带宽时,该接收端30配合该发送端进行调整该符号带宽并提取该第三帧结构中的业务信息和该第四帧结构中的业务信息,因此,可以在保证信息传输质量的同时使得该符号带宽能够逐渐平稳切换,进而可以避免符号带宽不稳定而影响用户的业务体验。In this embodiment, the sending end can decide whether to continue adjusting the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the second frame received by the receiving end 30. Therefore, when the sending end determines that it is necessary to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth, the receiving end 30 cooperates with the sending end to adjust the symbol bandwidth and extract the service information in the third frame structure and the service information in the fourth frame structure. , The symbol bandwidth can be gradually and smoothly switched while ensuring the quality of information transmission, thereby avoiding the instability of the symbol bandwidth and affecting the user's service experience.
前面对该接收端30的主要结构进行了介绍,下面将结合前述图3A所示的接收端30,进一步对该接收端30内部的各个模块的具体结构进行介绍。The main structure of the receiving terminal 30 has been introduced above, and the specific structure of each module inside the receiving terminal 30 will be further introduced in conjunction with the receiving terminal 30 shown in FIG. 3A.
在一种可选的实施方式中,如图3B所示,该切换信号提取模块303包括解调映射DeMAP模块3032和解帧模块3031。其中,该解帧模块3031与第二切换控制器301相连,以使得该解帧模块3031可以向该第二切换控制器301发送信息,例如,切换信息等。此外,该符号带宽同步环302与该解帧模块3031相连,以使得该解帧模块3031可以收到该符号带宽同步环302发送的信息,例如,第一帧或第二帧等。In an optional implementation manner, as shown in FIG. 3B, the switching signal extraction module 303 includes a demodulation and mapping module 3032 and a deframing module 3031. Wherein, the deframing module 3031 is connected to the second switching controller 301, so that the deframing module 3031 can send information, for example, switching information, to the second switching controller 301. In addition, the symbol bandwidth synchronization ring 302 is connected to the deframing module 3031, so that the deframing module 3031 can receive the information sent by the symbol bandwidth synchronization ring 302, for example, the first frame or the second frame.
此外,当该解帧模块3031收到该符号带宽同步环302发送的第一帧时,该解帧模块3031,用于对该第一帧解帧得到第三调制信息和第二调制信息。其中,该第二调制信息由业务信息经第一调制方式调制而成,以使得信息传输过程能提升传输效率,在传输一个符号的时长内可以传输多个比特信息。具体地,该第一调制方式可以为正交振幅调制QAM(例如,64QAM或256QAM)或其它高阶调制方式,具体此处不做限定。此外,该第三调制信息 由切换信息经第二调制方式调制而成,该第二调制方式可以BPSK调制或QPSK调制,具体此处不做限定。此外,该解帧模块3031,还用于采用第二解调方式将该第三调制信息解调为该切换信息,并向该第二切换控制器301发送该切换信息,以使得该第二切换控制器301可以根据该切换信息控制该符号带宽同步环302调整符号带宽。此外,该DeMAP模块3032,用于采用第一解调方式将该第二调制信息解调得到该业务信息。In addition, when the deframing module 3031 receives the first frame sent by the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, the deframing module 3031 is configured to deframe the first frame to obtain the third modulation information and the second modulation information. Wherein, the second modulation information is modulated by the service information through the first modulation method, so that the information transmission process can improve the transmission efficiency, and multiple bits of information can be transmitted within the duration of transmitting one symbol. Specifically, the first modulation method may be quadrature amplitude modulation QAM (for example, 64QAM or 256QAM) or other high-order modulation methods, which are not specifically limited here. In addition, the third modulation information is modulated by switching information through a second modulation method, and the second modulation method may be BPSK modulation or QPSK modulation, which is not specifically limited here. In addition, the deframing module 3031 is also used to demodulate the third modulation information into the switching information using a second demodulation method, and send the switching information to the second switching controller 301, so that the second switching The controller 301 can control the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the switching information. In addition, the DeMAP module 3032 is used to demodulate the second modulation information using the first demodulation method to obtain the service information.
应当理解的是,该切换信息提取模块303收到第二帧的操作与前述操作类似,具体此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the operation of the handover information extraction module 303 receiving the second frame is similar to the foregoing operation, and the details are not repeated here.
还应理解的是,当前述发送端20中的切换信息接收模块202采用如图2D所示的实施方式时,即该切换信息接收模块202中的组帧模块2022与该第一切换控制器201连接时,该接收端30应当采用前述图3B所示的实施方式。It should also be understood that when the switching information receiving module 202 in the aforementioned sending end 20 adopts the implementation as shown in FIG. 2D, that is, the framing module 2022 in the switching information receiving module 202 and the first switching controller 201 When connecting, the receiving end 30 should adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 3B.
在另一种可选的实施方式中,如图3C所示,该切换信号提取模块303包括解调映射DeMAP模块3032和解帧模块3031。其中,该DeMAP模块3032与第二切换控制器301相连,以使得该DeMAP模块3032可以向该第二切换控制器301发送信息,例如,切换信息等。此外,该符号带宽同步环302与该解帧模块3031相连,以使得该解帧模块3031可以收到该符号带宽同步环302发送的信息,例如,第一帧或第二帧等。In another optional implementation manner, as shown in FIG. 3C, the switching signal extraction module 303 includes a demodulation and mapping module 3032 and a deframing module 3031. Wherein, the DeMAP module 3032 is connected to the second switching controller 301, so that the DeMAP module 3032 can send information to the second switching controller 301, for example, switching information. In addition, the symbol bandwidth synchronization ring 302 is connected to the deframing module 3031, so that the deframing module 3031 can receive the information sent by the symbol bandwidth synchronization ring 302, for example, the first frame or the second frame.
此外,当该解帧模块3031收到该符号带宽同步环302发送的第一帧时,该解帧模块3031,用于对该第一帧解帧得到第一调制信息。其中,该第一调制信息由切换信息和业务信息经第一调制方式调整而成。于是,该DeMAP模块3032,用于采用第一解调方式将该第一调制信息解调得到该切换信息和业务信息。此外,该DeMAP模块3032,还用于向该第二切换控制器301发送该切换信息。其中,该第一调制方式可以为正交振幅调制QAM(例如,64QAM或256QAM)或其它高阶调制方式,具体此处不做限定。In addition, when the deframing module 3031 receives the first frame sent by the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, the deframing module 3031 is configured to deframe the first frame to obtain the first modulation information. Wherein, the first modulation information is obtained by adjusting the switching information and the service information through the first modulation mode. Therefore, the DeMAP module 3032 is used to demodulate the first modulation information using the first demodulation method to obtain the switching information and service information. In addition, the DeMAP module 3032 is also used to send the switching information to the second switching controller 301. Wherein, the first modulation method may be quadrature amplitude modulation QAM (for example, 64QAM or 256QAM) or other high-order modulation methods, which are not specifically limited here.
应当理解的是,该切换信息提取模块303收到第二帧的操作与前述操作类似,具体此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the operation of the handover information extraction module 303 receiving the second frame is similar to the foregoing operation, and the details are not repeated here.
还应理解的是,当前述发送端20中的切换信息接收模块202采用如图2E所示的实施方式时,即该切换信息接收模块202中的MAP模块2021与该第一切换控制器201连接时,该接收端30应当采用前述图3C所示的实施方式。It should also be understood that when the switching information receiving module 202 in the aforementioned sending end 20 adopts the implementation as shown in FIG. 2E, that is, the MAP module 2021 in the switching information receiving module 202 is connected to the first switching controller 201 At this time, the receiving end 30 should adopt the embodiment shown in FIG. 3C.
本实施例中,无论该切换信息提取模块303采用前述图3B对应的实施方式或者图3C对应的实施方式,该切换信息提取模块303从发送端发送的帧结构中提取切换信息和业务信息。采用前述调制方式均有利于将该切换信息和该业务信息准确高效地装载于该第一帧或第二帧中,以降低接收端接收的切换信息和业务信息的出错几率。In this embodiment, no matter the switching information extraction module 303 adopts the implementation corresponding to FIG. 3B or the implementation corresponding to FIG. 3C, the switching information extraction module 303 extracts switching information and service information from the frame structure sent by the sending end. Adopting the foregoing modulation methods is beneficial to accurately and efficiently load the switching information and the service information in the first frame or the second frame, so as to reduce the error probability of the switching information and the service information received by the receiving end.
进一步地,结合前述图3B所提出的实施方式,该接收端30可以进一步如图3D所示。此时,该接收端30中的符号带宽同步环302包括符号带宽同步模块3023和滤波装置。Further, in combination with the implementation manner proposed in FIG. 3B, the receiving end 30 may be further shown in FIG. 3D. At this time, the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 in the receiving end 30 includes a symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 and a filtering device.
其中,该符号带宽同步模块3023用于根据该切换信息将该第一符号带宽调整为第二符号带宽。该符号带宽同步模块3023还用于补偿收发频偏。该滤波装置用于调整携带待接收的帧结构的信号的波形,以使得按照切换后的符号带宽对应的周期调整滤波装置输出的信号的相位。其中,该待接收的帧结构可以包括前述第一帧或前述第二帧,具体此处不做限定。Wherein, the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 is configured to adjust the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information. The symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 is also used to compensate the frequency deviation of the transceiver. The filtering device is used to adjust the waveform of the signal carrying the frame structure to be received, so that the phase of the signal output by the filtering device is adjusted according to the period corresponding to the switched symbol bandwidth. The frame structure to be received may include the foregoing first frame or the foregoing second frame, which is not specifically limited here.
具体地,该滤波装置可以为根升余弦滤波器3021,也可以为差值滤波器3022,具体此处不做限定。其中,该根升余弦滤波器3021用于接收匹配滤波,减少码间串扰ISI。该差值滤波器3021用于完成DAC采样频率到接收最佳采样点的抽取,避免混叠。Specifically, the filtering device may be a root raised cosine filter 3021 or a difference filter 3022, which is not specifically limited here. Among them, the root raised cosine filter 3021 is used for receiving matched filtering to reduce ISI of inter-symbol interference. The difference filter 3021 is used to complete the decimation from the DAC sampling frequency to the optimal receiving sampling point to avoid aliasing.
在实际应用中,为了接收端的解调效率以及解调的准确率,可以将根升余弦滤波器3021和差值滤波器3022结合使用,以作为滤波装置。In practical applications, for the demodulation efficiency and accuracy of the demodulation at the receiving end, the root raised cosine filter 3021 and the difference filter 3022 can be used in combination as a filtering device.
应当理解的是,前述符号带宽同步环302可以为符号带宽闭环同步环路或符号带宽开环同步环路。前述图3D所示的符号带宽同步环302为符号带宽闭环同步环路。此时,该符号带宽同步环302包括符号带宽同步模块3023、差值滤波器3021和根升余弦滤波器3022。其中,该差值滤波器3021与该根升余弦滤波器3022连接,该根升余弦滤波器3022与该符号带宽同步模块3023连接,该符号带宽同步模块3023与该差值滤波器3021连接。因此,构成一个从差值滤波器3021,到根升余弦滤波器3022,再到符号带宽同步模块3023的一个闭合环路。It should be understood that the aforementioned symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 may be a symbol bandwidth closed loop synchronization loop or a symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop. The aforementioned symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 shown in FIG. 3D is a symbol bandwidth closed loop synchronization loop. At this time, the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 includes a symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023, a difference filter 3021, and a root raised cosine filter 3022. Wherein, the difference filter 3021 is connected to the root raised cosine filter 3022, the root raised cosine filter 3022 is connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023, and the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 is connected to the difference filter 3021. Therefore, a closed loop is formed from the difference filter 3021, to the root raised cosine filter 3022, and then to the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023.
此外,如图3E所示,当该符号带宽同步环302为符号带宽开环同步环路时,该符号带宽同步环302包括符号带宽同步模块3023、差值滤波器3021和根升余弦滤波器3022。其中,该差值滤波器3021与该根升余弦滤波器3022连接。但是,该根升余弦滤波器3022并未与该符号带宽同步模块3023连接,而是直接与解帧模块3031连接,再由该解帧模块3031与该符号带宽同步模块3023连接。此外,该符号带宽同步模块3023与前述差值滤波器3021构成双向连接。In addition, as shown in FIG. 3E, when the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 is a symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop, the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 includes a symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023, a difference filter 3021, and a root raised cosine filter 3022 . Wherein, the difference filter 3021 is connected to the root raised cosine filter 3022. However, the root raised cosine filter 3022 is not connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023, but is directly connected to the deframing module 3031, and then the deframing module 3031 is connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023. In addition, the symbol bandwidth synchronization module 3023 and the aforementioned difference filter 3021 form a bidirectional connection.
应当理解的是,本实施方式所提出的符号带宽同步环302可以采用前述图3D所示的符号带宽闭环同步环路,也可以采用前述图3E所示的符号带宽开环同步环路,具体不做限定。当采用符号带宽开环同步环路时,该符号带宽开环同步环路的具体实现方式可以与前述图3C所提出的实施方式相结合,具体此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 proposed in this embodiment may adopt the symbol bandwidth closed loop synchronization loop shown in FIG. 3D, or the symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop shown in FIG. 3E. Make a limit. When the symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop is adopted, the specific implementation of the symbol bandwidth open loop synchronization loop can be combined with the implementation manner proposed in FIG. 3C, and the details will not be repeated here.
还应理解的是,在实际应用中,因应用场景的不同,符号带宽闭环同步环路的内部结构与前述图3D所示的符号带宽闭环同步环路的内部结构可能存在差异,符号带宽开环同步环路的内部结构与前述图3E所示的符号带宽开环同步环路的内部结构可能存在差异,具体此处不做限定。It should also be understood that in practical applications, due to different application scenarios, the internal structure of the symbol bandwidth closed-loop synchronization loop may be different from the internal structure of the symbol bandwidth closed-loop synchronization loop shown in Figure 3D, and the symbol bandwidth is open loop. The internal structure of the synchronization loop may be different from the internal structure of the symbol bandwidth open-loop synchronization loop shown in FIG. 3E, which is not specifically limited here.
此外,当接收端执行减小符号带宽的功能时,该接收端的内部结构与前述图3A类似,In addition, when the receiving end performs the function of reducing the symbol bandwidth, the internal structure of the receiving end is similar to the aforementioned FIG. 3A,
其中,该接收端30包括第二切换控制器301、符号带宽同步环302、切换信息提取模块303以及第二收发模块304。其中,第二切换控制器301分别与符号带宽同步环302和切换信息提取模块303连接,该符号带宽同步环302与切换信息提取模块303连接。其中,前述各个模块的功能与前文中该接收端执行增大符号带宽的功能类似,具体此处不再赘述。The receiving end 30 includes a second switching controller 301, a symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, a switching information extraction module 303, and a second transceiver module 304. The second switching controller 301 is connected to the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 and the switching information extraction module 303 respectively, and the symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302 is connected to the switching information extraction module 303. Among them, the functions of the aforementioned modules are similar to those of the receiving end performing the function of increasing the symbol bandwidth in the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
该切换信号提取模块303包括解调映射DeMAP模块3032和解帧模块3031。其中,该DeMAP模块3032的功能和解帧模块3031的功能与前文图3B和图3C对应的实施例中的功能类似,具体此处不再赘述。The switching signal extraction module 303 includes a demodulation and mapping DeMAP module 3032 and a deframing module 3031. Among them, the function of the DeMAP module 3032 and the function of the deframing module 3031 are similar to the functions in the previous embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3B and FIG. 3C, and the details are not repeated here.
此外,该接收端30还包括符号带宽同步环302,该符号带宽同步环302用于采用切换 信息调整频率控制字,补充接收端与发送端之间的频率偏移和相位偏移。具体地,可以参见前文图3D中的相关介绍,具体此处不再赘述。In addition, the receiving end 30 also includes a symbol bandwidth synchronization loop 302, which is used to adjust the frequency control word using switching information to supplement the frequency offset and phase offset between the receiving end and the transmitting end. Specifically, please refer to the related introduction in Figure 3D above, and the details will not be repeated here.
本实施方式中,在相同的时间中,该第一帧与该第二帧分别传输了不同的数量的符号。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率与传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率不同。由于,该第一帧中携带该第一信息的符号数大于该第二帧中携带该第二信息的符号数。因此,传输该第一帧中的每个符号的速率大于传输该第二帧中的每个符号的速率。由于,该第一帧与该第二帧中均携带了业务信息,即前述第一信息和前述第二信息均为该业务的信息,因此,该发送端在将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽的过程中一直保持着该业务的信息的传输,因此,不会增加数据报文延时,避免了业务传输中断。In this embodiment, in the same time, the first frame and the second frame respectively transmit different numbers of symbols. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is different from the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Because the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame. Therefore, the rate at which each symbol in the first frame is transmitted is greater than the rate at which each symbol in the second frame is transmitted. Since both the first frame and the second frame carry service information, that is, the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the service, so the sending end is switching the bandwidth of the first symbol to the second symbol. In the process of symbol bandwidth, the transmission of the information of the service is always maintained, so the data message delay will not be increased, and the interruption of service transmission is avoided.
上面对本申请实施例所涉及的发送端和接收端进行了详细介绍,下面将对本申请实施例所涉及的带宽切换方法的具体流程进行介绍,如图4所示,当第一符号带宽小于第二符号带宽时,该带宽切换方法中的发送端和接收端所执行的步骤包括:The sending end and the receiving end involved in the embodiment of this application are described in detail above, and the specific process of the bandwidth switching method involved in the embodiment of this application will be introduced below. As shown in FIG. 4, when the bandwidth of the first symbol is less than the bandwidth of the second symbol In the case of symbol bandwidth, the steps performed by the sending end and the receiving end in the bandwidth switching method include:
401、发送端根据切换信息和业务信息确定第一帧。401. The sending end determines the first frame according to the switching information and the service information.
本实施例中,在该发送端向该接收端传输业务数据的过程中,即该发送端向该接收端发送业务信息的过程中,若该发送端需要调整符号带宽,则该发送端需要控制该发送端内部的各个模块调整符号带宽,并将调整符号带宽所需的参数通知于该接收端。In this embodiment, during the process of the sending end transmitting service data to the receiving end, that is, during the process of sending service information from the sending end to the receiving end, if the sending end needs to adjust the symbol bandwidth, the sending end needs to control Each module inside the transmitting end adjusts the symbol bandwidth, and notifies the receiving end of the parameters required to adjust the symbol bandwidth.
具体地,该发送端可以确定切换信息,该切换信息用于指示将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽。更具体地,该切换信息包括该发送端调整符号带宽所需的参数。该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。Specifically, the sending end may determine switching information, where the switching information is used to instruct to switch the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. More specifically, the switching information includes parameters required by the transmitting end to adjust the symbol bandwidth. The switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
可选的,该切换信息可以为该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进。具体与前述表1类似,具体此处不再赘述。Optionally, the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step. The details are similar to the foregoing Table 1, and the details are not repeated here.
可选的,该切换信息可以为前述切换步进。Optionally, the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step.
可选的,该切换信息可以为第二周期,该第二周期与一个该切换步进对应,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长。Optionally, the switching information may be a second period, the second period corresponding to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth.
可选的,该切换信息可以包括携带该业务信息的符号数和携带该冗余信息的符号数。Optionally, the switching information may include the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
可选的,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。具体地,与前文类似,具体此处不再赘述。Optionally, the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
然后,该发送端将从信源获得的业务信息和前述切换信息经调制和组帧处理得到第一帧。其中,该调制和组帧处理可以参见前文图2D和前文图2E对应的实施例中的相关描述,具体此处不再赘述。Then, the sending end obtains the first frame by modulating and framing the service information obtained from the source and the aforementioned switching information. For the modulation and framing processing, reference may be made to the related descriptions in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2D and the foregoing FIG. 2E, and the details are not repeated here.
402、该发送端采用该第一符号带宽向接收端发送该第一帧。402. The sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the first frame to the receiving end.
本实施例中,该发送端采用该第一符号带宽向接收端发送该第一帧,于是,该接收端可以采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收该第一帧。其中,该第一帧携带前述切换信息和前述业务信息。In this embodiment, the sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the first frame to the receiving end, so the receiving end may use the first symbol bandwidth to receive the first frame from the sending end. Wherein, the first frame carries the aforementioned switching information and the aforementioned service information.
本实施例中,由于该第一帧中携带切换信息,因此,该发送端可以通过向该接收端发送第一帧的方式通知该接收端接收该切换信息,以使得该接收端在接收该第一帧之后执行 步骤403。In this embodiment, since the first frame carries switching information, the sending end can notify the receiving end to receive the switching information by sending the first frame to the receiving end, so that the receiving end is receiving the first frame. Step 403 is executed one frame later.
403、该接收端从该第一帧中获取该切换信息和该业务信息。403. The receiving end obtains the switching information and the service information from the first frame.
本实施例中,该接收端将对该第一帧进行解调和解帧以获取该第一帧中携带的切换信息和该业务信息。具体地,前述解调和解帧处理可以参见前文图3B或前文图3C对应的实施例中的相关描述,具体此处不再赘述。In this embodiment, the receiving end will demodulate and deframe the first frame to obtain the switching information and the service information carried in the first frame. Specifically, for the foregoing demodulation and deframing processing, reference may be made to the related description in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3B or the foregoing FIG. 3C, and details are not repeated here.
404、该接收端向发送端发送确认信息。404. The receiving end sends confirmation information to the sending end.
本实施例中,步骤404为可选的步骤。In this embodiment, step 404 is an optional step.
当该接收端成功从该第一帧中获取该切换信息之后,该接收端可以向该发送端发送确认信息以指示该发送端该接收端已成功获取该切换信息。After the receiving end successfully obtains the switching information from the first frame, the receiving end may send confirmation information to the sending end to indicate to the sending end that the receiving end has successfully obtained the switching information.
405、该接收端根据该切换信息将该第一符号带宽切换至该第二符号带宽。405. The receiving end switches the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information.
本实施例中,当执行步骤404时,步骤404和步骤405无明确的时间先后顺序的限定,该步骤404和步骤405仅需在前述步骤403之后执行即可。In this embodiment, when step 404 is performed, step 404 and step 405 have no clear time sequence limitation, and step 404 and step 405 only need to be performed after step 403 described above.
本实施例中,该接收端将根据该切换信息调整符号带宽,具体地,将第一符号带宽调整为第二符号带宽。该接收端还可以将该业务信息发送至信宿,以保证业务信息的持续传输,以避免业务中断。In this embodiment, the receiving end will adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the switching information, specifically, adjust the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The receiving end may also send the service information to the sink to ensure continuous transmission of the service information to avoid service interruption.
406、该发送端根据该切换信息、该业务信息和冗余信息确定第二帧,该冗余信息位于该第二帧的末尾。406. The sending end determines a second frame according to the switching information, the service information, and the redundancy information, and the redundancy information is located at the end of the second frame.
本实施例中,当不执行步骤404时,该发送端在执行步骤402之后等待若干时间即可执行步骤406,即步骤406与前述步骤403和步骤405之间无明确的时间先后顺序的限定,仅需在步骤402之后执行即可。其中,该发送端等待若干时间的操作可以采用定时器的方式实现,该定时器的具体时长可以根据实际需求配置,具体此处不做限定。In this embodiment, when step 404 is not performed, the sender can perform step 406 after performing step 402 after waiting for a certain period of time, that is, there is no clear time sequence between step 406 and the aforementioned steps 403 and 405. It only needs to be executed after step 402. Wherein, the operation of the sending end to wait for a certain period of time may be implemented in the manner of a timer, and the specific duration of the timer may be configured according to actual requirements, which is not specifically limited here.
本实施例中,当执行步骤404时,该步骤406将在步骤404之后执行,该步骤406与前述步骤405之间无明确的时间先后顺序的限定。In this embodiment, when step 404 is performed, step 406 will be performed after step 404, and there is no clear time sequence limitation between step 406 and the aforementioned step 405.
本实施例中,由于,该发送端已在前述步骤中通过第一帧所携带的切换信息指示该接收端调整符号带宽。因此,该发送端可以采用该第二符号带宽传输业务信息。具体地,该发送端可以根据该切换信息、该业务信息和冗余信息确定第二帧,以通过向该接收端发送第二帧的方式向该接收端传输业务信息。其中,该发送端确定第二帧的实现方式可以参见前文图2B或前文图2C对应的实施例中的相关描述,具体此处不再赘述。In this embodiment, because the sending end has instructed the receiving end to adjust the symbol bandwidth through the switching information carried in the first frame in the foregoing steps. Therefore, the sending end can use the second symbol bandwidth to transmit service information. Specifically, the sending end may determine the second frame according to the switching information, the service information, and the redundancy information, and transmit the service information to the receiving end by sending the second frame to the receiving end. For the implementation manner of the sending end determining the second frame, reference may be made to the related description in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2B or the foregoing FIG. 2C, and details are not repeated here.
407、该发送端采用该第二符号带宽向该接收端发送该第二帧。407. The sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end.
本实施例中,当该发送端采用该第二符号带宽向该接收端发送该第二帧之后,由于该接收端在前述步骤中已根据切换信息将第一符号带宽调整为第二符号带宽,于是,该接收端可以采用该第二符号带宽从该发送端接收第二帧。In this embodiment, after the sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end, since the receiving end has adjusted the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information in the foregoing steps, Therefore, the receiving end may use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second frame from the sending end.
408、该接收端从该第二帧获取该业务信息。408. The receiving end obtains the service information from the second frame.
其中,该第二帧携带该该业务信息和冗余信息。Wherein, the second frame carries the service information and redundant information.
本实施例中,由于,该接收端在前述步骤中已将第一符号带宽调整为第二符号带宽,因此,该接收端可以从该第二帧中获取该业务信息,并丢弃该第二帧中的冗余信息。In this embodiment, since the receiving end has adjusted the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth in the foregoing steps, the receiving end can obtain the service information from the second frame and discard the second frame Redundant information in.
409、该接收端向该发送端发送传输质量信息。409. The receiving end sends transmission quality information to the sending end.
本实施例中,步骤409为可选的步骤。In this embodiment, step 409 is an optional step.
其中,该传输信号质量信息用于指示该接收端采用该第二符号带宽接收该第二帧的信号质量。当该发送端接收该接收端发送的传输质量信息之后,该发送端可以根据该传输质量信息的优劣确定是否需要继续调整符号带宽。例如,该发送端可以确定继续采用该第二符号带宽传输业务信息,该发送端也可以确定循环前述步骤401至步骤408,以继续调整符号带宽。此外,该传输质量信息可以为均方误差MSE或信噪比SNR,具体与前文类似,此处不再赘述。Wherein, the transmission signal quality information is used to instruct the receiving end to use the second symbol bandwidth to receive the signal quality of the second frame. After the sending end receives the transmission quality information sent by the receiving end, the sending end can determine whether to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the quality of the transmission quality information. For example, the sending end may determine to continue to use the second symbol bandwidth to transmit service information, and the sending end may also determine to loop the foregoing steps 401 to 408 to continue to adjust the symbol bandwidth. In addition, the transmission quality information may be the mean square error MSE or the signal-to-noise ratio SNR, which is similar to the foregoing and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中,由于发送端发给接收端的第一帧中携带了切换信息和业务信息,因此,不仅可以在该发送端切换符号带宽之前就通知接收端调整符号带宽,还可以使该接收端从该第一帧中获取业务信息以保证业务的持续进行。又由于发送端中的符号带宽适配模块可以在第一使能信号的使能作用下按照第二符号带宽对应的频率输出第二帧,并将该携带了冗余信息和业务信息的第二帧发送给接收端,因此,该发送端不仅可以将发送该第二帧的带宽调整为第二符号带宽,还可以在采用该第二符号带宽发送第二帧时保证业务的持续进行。In the embodiment of this application, since the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries switching information and service information, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but the receiver can also be The terminal obtains the service information from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service. In addition, because the symbol bandwidth adaptation module in the transmitting end can output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second symbol bandwidth under the enablement of the first enable signal, and transfer the second frame that carries redundant information and service information. The frame is sent to the receiving end. Therefore, the sending end can not only adjust the bandwidth for sending the second frame to the second symbol bandwidth, but also ensure the continuation of the service when using the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame.
此外,当第一符号带宽大于第二符号带宽时,如图5所示,该带宽切换方法中的发送端和接收端所执行的步骤包括:In addition, when the bandwidth of the first symbol is greater than the bandwidth of the second symbol, as shown in FIG. 5, the steps performed by the transmitting end and the receiving end in the bandwidth switching method include:
501、发送端根据切换信息和业务的第一信息确定第一帧。501. The sending end determines the first frame according to the switching information and the first information of the service.
具体地,该发送端可以确定切换信息,该切换信息用于指示将第一符号带宽切换至第二符号带宽。更具体地,该切换信息包括该发送端调整符号带宽所需的参数。该切换信息用于指示切换步进,该切换步进为该第二符号带宽与该第一符号带宽的差值。Specifically, the sending end may determine switching information, where the switching information is used to instruct to switch the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. More specifically, the switching information includes parameters required by the transmitting end to adjust the symbol bandwidth. The switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the difference between the second symbol bandwidth and the first symbol bandwidth.
可选的,该切换信息可以为该切换步进的标识,该切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进。具体与前述表1类似,具体此处不再赘述。Optionally, the switching information may be an identification of the switching step, and the identification of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step. The details are similar to the foregoing Table 1, and the details are not repeated here.
可选的,该切换信息可以为前述切换步进。Optionally, the switching information may be the aforementioned switching step.
可选的,该切换信息可以为第二周期,该第二周期与一个该切换步进对应,该第二周期为采用该第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长。Optionally, the switching information may be a second period, the second period corresponding to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth.
可选的,该切换信息可以包括携带该业务的第二信息的符号数。Optionally, the handover information may include the number of symbols carrying the second information of the service.
可选的,该切换信息还包括切换次数,该切换次数为该发送端按照该切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。具体地,与前文类似,具体此处不再赘述。Optionally, the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step. Specifically, it is similar to the foregoing, and the details are not repeated here.
然后,该发送端将从信源获得的业务信息和前述切换信息经调制和组帧处理得到第一帧。其中,该调制和组帧处理可以参见前文图2D和前文图2E对应的实施例中的相关描述,具体此处不再赘述。Then, the sending end obtains the first frame by modulating and framing the service information obtained from the source and the aforementioned switching information. For the modulation and framing processing, reference may be made to the related descriptions in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2D and the foregoing FIG. 2E, and the details are not repeated here.
502、该发送端采用该第一符号带宽向接收端发送该第一帧。502. The sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the first frame to the receiving end.
其中,该第一帧携带前述切换信息和前述业务的第一信息。Wherein, the first frame carries the aforementioned switching information and the aforementioned first information of the service.
本实施例中,由于该第一帧中携带切换信息,因此,该发送端可以通过向该接收端发送第一帧的方式通知该接收端接收该切换信息,以使得该接收端在接收该第一帧之后执行步骤503。In this embodiment, since the first frame carries switching information, the sending end can notify the receiving end to receive the switching information by sending the first frame to the receiving end, so that the receiving end is receiving the first frame. Step 503 is executed one frame later.
503、该接收端从该第一帧中获取该切换信息和该业务的第一信息。503. The receiving end obtains the switching information and the first information of the service from the first frame.
本实施例中,该接收端将对该第一帧进行解调和解帧以获取该第一帧中携带的切换信息和该第一信息。具体地,前述解调和解帧处理可以参见前文图3B或前文图3C对应的实施例中的相关描述,具体此处不再赘述。In this embodiment, the receiving end will demodulate and deframe the first frame to obtain the switching information and the first information carried in the first frame. Specifically, for the foregoing demodulation and deframing processing, reference may be made to the related description in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3B or the foregoing FIG. 3C, and details are not repeated here.
504、该接收端向发送端发送确认信息。504. The receiving end sends confirmation information to the sending end.
本实施例中,步骤504为可选的步骤。In this embodiment, step 504 is an optional step.
步骤504与前述步骤404类似,具体此处不再赘述。Step 504 is similar to the aforementioned step 404, and the details will not be repeated here.
505、该接收端根据该切换信息将该第一符号带宽切换至该第二符号带宽。505. The receiving end switches the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth according to the switching information.
本实施例中,当执行步骤504时,步骤504和步骤505无明确的时间先后顺序的限定,该步骤504和步骤505仅需在前述步骤503之后执行即可。In this embodiment, when step 504 is performed, step 504 and step 505 have no clear time sequence limitation, and step 504 and step 505 only need to be performed after step 503 described above.
本实施例中,该接收端将根据该切换信息调整符号带宽,具体地,将第一符号带宽调整为第二符号带宽。该接收端还可以将该业务信息发送至信宿,以保证业务信息的持续传输,以避免业务中断。In this embodiment, the receiving end will adjust the symbol bandwidth according to the switching information, specifically, adjust the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth. The receiving end may also send the service information to the sink to ensure continuous transmission of the service information to avoid service interruption.
506、该发送端根据业务的第二信息确定第二帧。506. The sending end determines the second frame according to the second information of the service.
本实施例中,当不执行步骤504时,该发送端在执行步骤502之后等待若干时间即可执行步骤506,即步骤506与前述步骤503和步骤505之间无明确的时间先后顺序的限定,仅需在步骤502之后执行即可。其中,该发送端等待若干时间的操作可以采用定时器的方式实现,该定时器的具体时长可以根据实际需求配置,具体此处不做限定。In this embodiment, when step 504 is not performed, the sending end can perform step 506 after performing step 502 after waiting for a certain period of time, that is, there is no clear time sequence between step 506 and the aforementioned steps 503 and step 505. It only needs to be executed after step 502. Wherein, the operation of the sending end to wait for a certain period of time may be implemented in the manner of a timer, and the specific duration of the timer may be configured according to actual requirements, which is not specifically limited here.
本实施例中,当执行步骤504时,该步骤506将在步骤504之后执行,该步骤506与前述步骤505之间无明确的时间先后顺序的限定。In this embodiment, when step 504 is performed, step 506 will be performed after step 504, and there is no clear time sequence limitation between step 506 and the aforementioned step 505.
本实施例中,由于,该发送端已在前述步骤中通过第一帧所携带的切换信息指示该接收端调整符号带宽。因此,该发送端可以采用该第二符号带宽传输该业务的第二信息。具体地,该发送端可以根据该业务的第二信息确定第二帧,以通过向该接收端发送第二帧的方式向该接收端传输业务的第二信息。其中,该发送端确定第二帧的实现方式可以参见前文图2B或前文图2C对应的实施例中的相关描述,具体此处不再赘述。In this embodiment, because the sending end has instructed the receiving end to adjust the symbol bandwidth through the switching information carried in the first frame in the foregoing steps. Therefore, the sending end can use the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the second information of the service. Specifically, the sending end may determine the second frame according to the second information of the service, and transmit the second information of the service to the receiving end by sending the second frame to the receiving end. For the implementation manner of the sending end determining the second frame, reference may be made to the related description in the foregoing embodiment corresponding to FIG. 2B or the foregoing FIG. 2C, and details are not repeated here.
507、该发送端采用该第二符号带宽向该接收端发送该第二帧。507. The sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the second frame to the receiving end.
其中,该第二帧包含前述业务的第二信息。Wherein, the second frame contains the second information of the aforementioned service.
508、该接收端从该第二帧获取该业务的第二信息。508. The receiving end obtains second information of the service from the second frame.
本实施例中,由于,该接收端在前述步骤中已将第一符号带宽调整为第二符号带宽,因此,该接收端可以从该第二帧中获取该业务的第二信息。In this embodiment, since the receiving end has adjusted the first symbol bandwidth to the second symbol bandwidth in the foregoing steps, the receiving end can obtain the second information of the service from the second frame.
509、该接收端向该发送端发送传输质量信息。509. The receiving end sends transmission quality information to the sending end.
本实施例中,步骤509为可选的步骤。In this embodiment, step 509 is an optional step.
步骤509与前述步骤409类似,具体此处不再赘述。Step 509 is similar to the aforementioned step 409, and the details are not repeated here.
本申请实施例中,由于发送端发给接收端的第一帧中携带了切换信息和业务的第一信息,因此,不仅可以在该发送端切换符号带宽之前就通知接收端调整符号带宽,还可以使该接收端从该第一帧中获取业务的第一信息以保证业务的持续进行。又由于发送端发送给接收端的第二帧中携带了业务的第二信息,并且,前述第一信息和前述第二信息均为同一 业务的信息。因此,在采用该第二符号带宽发送第二帧时保证业务的持续进行。In the embodiment of the present application, since the first frame sent by the sender to the receiver carries the switching information and the first information of the service, not only can the receiver be notified to adjust the symbol bandwidth before the sender switches the symbol bandwidth, but also The receiving end is made to obtain the first information of the service from the first frame to ensure the continuation of the service. In addition, the second frame sent by the sending end to the receiving end carries the second information of the service, and the foregoing first information and the foregoing second information are both information of the same service. Therefore, when the second symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the second frame, the continuous operation of the service is ensured.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of the description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device, and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的精神和范围。The above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, not to limit them; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that they can still compare the previous embodiments. The recorded technical solutions are modified, or some of the technical features are equivalently replaced; and these modifications or replacements do not cause the essence of the corresponding technical solutions to deviate from the spirit and scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.

Claims (28)

  1. 一种发送端,其特征在于,包括:A sending end, which is characterized in that it comprises:
    接收模块,用于接收业务信息;The receiving module is used to receive business information;
    发送模块,用于采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送所述业务信息,所述业务信息位于第一帧中;A sending module, configured to send the service information to the receiving end using the first symbol bandwidth, where the service information is located in the first frame;
    所述发送模块,还用于采用所述第二符号带宽向所述接收端发送所述业务信息和冗余信息,所述业务信息和所述冗余信息位于第二帧中,采用所述第一符号带宽传输所述业务信息的时长与采用所述第二符号带宽传输所述业务信息和所述冗余信息的时长相同。The sending module is further configured to use the second symbol bandwidth to send the service information and redundant information to the receiving end, the service information and the redundant information are located in a second frame, and the second symbol bandwidth is used. The duration of transmitting the service information in one symbol bandwidth is the same as the duration of transmitting the service information and the redundant information using the second symbol bandwidth.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的发送端,其特征在于,所述第一帧还包括切换信息,所述切换信息用于指示切换步进,所述切换步进为所述第二符号带宽与所述第一符号带宽的差值。The sending end according to claim 1, wherein the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and the The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的发送端,其特征在于,所述切换信息包括如下任意一项:The sending end according to claim 2, wherein the handover information includes any one of the following:
    所述切换步进的标识,所述切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;The identifier of the switching step, the identifier of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step;
    或者,所述切换步进;Or, the switching step;
    或者,第二周期,所述第二周期与一个所述切换步进对应,所述第二周期为采用所述第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;Or, a second period, where the second period corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth;
    或者,携带所述业务信息的符号数和携带所述冗余信息的符号数。Or, the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的发送端,其特征在于,所述切换信息还包括切换次数,所述切换次数为所述发送端按照所述切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。The sending end according to claim 3, wherein the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching is the number of times the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任意一项所述的发送端,其特征在于,所述发送端还包括处理模块;The sending end according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the sending end further comprises a processing module;
    所述处理模块,用于在所述业务信息的末尾配置所述冗余信息得到所述第二帧。The processing module is configured to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的发送端,其特征在于,所述处理模块包括先入先出模块FIFO和选择器;The sending end according to claim 5, wherein the processing module comprises a first-in-first-out module (FIFO) and a selector;
    所述FIFO,用于缓存所述业务信息,并将所述业务信息输入至所述选择器;The FIFO is used to buffer the service information and input the service information to the selector;
    所述选择器,用于在所述业务信息的末尾配置所述冗余信息得到所述第二帧,并按照所述第二周期对应的频率输出所述第二帧。The selector is configured to configure the redundant information at the end of the service information to obtain the second frame, and output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second period.
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的发送端,其特征在于,所述处理模块包括随机存取存储器RAM,所述RAM用于缓存所述业务信息,在所述业务信息的末尾配置所述冗余信息得到所述第二帧,并按照所述第二周期对应的频率输出所述第二帧。The sending end according to claim 5, wherein the processing module comprises a random access memory RAM, the RAM is used to cache the service information, and the redundant information is configured at the end of the service information to obtain The second frame, and output the second frame according to the frequency corresponding to the second period.
  8. 一种接收端,其特征在于,包括:A receiving terminal, characterized in that it comprises:
    接收模块,用于采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务信息,所述业务信息位于第一帧中;A receiving module, configured to use the first symbol bandwidth to receive service information from the sending end, where the service information is located in the first frame;
    所述接收模块,还用于采用第二符号带宽从所述发送端接收所述业务信息和冗余信息,所述业务信息和所述冗余信息位于第二帧中,采用所述第一符号带宽传输所述业务信息的时长与采用所述第二符号带宽传输所述业务信息和所述冗余信息的时长相同。The receiving module is further configured to receive the service information and redundant information from the sending end using a second symbol bandwidth, the service information and the redundant information are located in a second frame, and the first symbol is used The duration of the bandwidth for transmitting the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的接收端,其特征在于,所述第一帧还包括切换信息,所述切换信息用于指示切换步进,所述切换步进为所述第二符号带宽与所述第一符号带宽的差值。The receiving end according to claim 8, wherein the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and the The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的接收端,其特征在于,所述切换信息包括如下任意一项:The receiving end according to claim 9, wherein the handover information includes any one of the following:
    所述切换步进的标识,所述切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;The identifier of the switching step, the identifier of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step;
    或者,所述切换步进;Or, the switching step;
    或者,第二周期,所述第二周期与一个所述切换步进对应,所述第二周期为采用所述第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;Or, a second period, where the second period corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth;
    或者,携带所述业务信息的符号数和携带所述冗余信息的符号数。Or, the number of symbols carrying the service information and the number of symbols carrying the redundant information.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的接收端,其特征在于,所述切换信息还包括切换次数,所述切换次数为所述发送端按照所述切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。The receiving end according to claim 10, wherein the switching information further includes the number of times of switching, and the number of times of switching is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step.
  12. 根据权利要求9至11中任意一项所述的接收端,其特征在于,所述接收端包括处理模块;The receiving end according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein the receiving end comprises a processing module;
    所述处理模块,用于从所述第一帧提取所述切换信息;The processing module is configured to extract the switching information from the first frame;
    所述处理模块,还用于根据所述切换步进调整采样频率,所述采样频率的倒数为所述第二周期。The processing module is further configured to adjust a sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period.
  13. 一种发送端,其特征在于,包括:A sending end, which is characterized in that it comprises:
    接收模块,用于接收业务的第一信息和所述业务的第二信息;The receiving module is used to receive the first information of the service and the second information of the service;
    发送模块,用于采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送所述第一信息,所述第一信息位于第一帧中;A sending module, configured to send the first information to the receiving end using the first symbol bandwidth, where the first information is located in the first frame;
    所述发送模块,还用于采用第二符号带宽向所述接收端发送所述第二信息,所述第二信息位于第二帧中,采用第一符号带宽传输所述第一信息的时长与采用第二符号带宽传输所述第二信息的时长相同,所述第一帧中携带所述第一信息的符号数大于所述第二帧中携带所述第二信息的符号数。The sending module is further configured to use a second symbol bandwidth to send the second information to the receiving end, the second information is located in a second frame, and the first symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the first information and the length of time The duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth is the same, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的发送端,其特征在于,所述第一帧还包括切换信息,所述切换信息用于指示切换步进,所述切换步进为所述第二符号带宽与所述第一符号带宽的差值。The transmitter according to claim 13, wherein the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and the The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的发送端,其特征在于,所述切换信息包括如下任意一项:The sending end according to claim 14, wherein the handover information includes any one of the following:
    所述切换步进的标识,所述切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;The identifier of the switching step, the identifier of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step;
    或者,所述切换步进;Or, the switching step;
    或者,第二周期,所述第二周期与一个所述切换步进对应,所述第二周期为采用所述第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;Or, a second period, where the second period corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth;
    或者,携带所述第二信息的符号数。Or, the number of symbols carrying the second information.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的发送端,其特征在于,所述切换信息还包括切换次数,所述切换次数为所述发送端按照所述切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。The sending end according to claim 15, wherein the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching times is the number of times the sending end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step.
  17. 一种接收端,其特征在于,包括:A receiving terminal, characterized in that it comprises:
    接收模块,用于采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务的第一信息,所述第一信息位于第一帧中;A receiving module, configured to receive first information of a service from a sending end by using a first symbol bandwidth, where the first information is located in a first frame;
    所述接收模块,还用于采用第二符号带宽从所述发送端接收所述业务的第二信息,所述第二信息位于第二帧中,采用所述第一符号带宽传输所述第一信息的时长与采用所述第 二符号带宽传输所述第二信息的时长相同,所述第一帧中携带所述第一信息的符号数大于所述第二帧中携带所述第二信息的符号数。The receiving module is further configured to receive second information of the service from the sending end using a second symbol bandwidth, the second information is located in a second frame, and the first symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the first information. The duration of information is the same as the duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame Symbol number.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的接收端,其特征在于,所述第一帧还包括切换信息,所述切换信息用于指示切换步进,所述切换步进为所述第二符号带宽与所述第一符号带宽的差值。The receiving end according to claim 17, wherein the first frame further includes switching information, the switching information is used to indicate a switching step, and the switching step is the second symbol bandwidth and the The difference in the bandwidth of the first symbol.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的接收端,其特征在于,所述切换信息包括如下任意一项:The receiving end according to claim 18, wherein the handover information includes any one of the following:
    所述切换步进的标识,所述切换步进的标识用于指示一个切换步进;The identifier of the switching step, the identifier of the switching step is used to indicate a switching step;
    或者,所述切换步进;Or, the switching step;
    或者,第二周期,所述第二周期与一个所述切换步进对应,所述第二周期为采用所述第二符号带宽传输一个符号的时长;Or, a second period, where the second period corresponds to one of the switching steps, and the second period is the duration of transmitting one symbol using the second symbol bandwidth;
    或者,携带所述第二信息的符号数。Or, the number of symbols carrying the second information.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的接收端,其特征在于,所述切换信息还包括切换次数,所述切换次数为所述发送端按照所述切换步进切换符号带宽的次数。The receiving end according to claim 19, wherein the switching information further includes the number of switching times, and the number of switching is the number of times the transmitting end switches the symbol bandwidth according to the switching step.
  21. 根据权利要求18至20中任意一项所述的接收端,其特征在于,所述接收端包括处理模块;The receiving end according to any one of claims 18 to 20, wherein the receiving end comprises a processing module;
    所述处理模块,用于从所述第一帧提取所述切换信息;The processing module is configured to extract the switching information from the first frame;
    所述处理模块,还用于根据所述切换步进调整采样频率,所述采样频率的倒数为所述第二周期。The processing module is further configured to adjust a sampling frequency according to the switching step, and the reciprocal of the sampling frequency is the second period.
  22. 一种带宽切换方法,其特征在于,包括:A bandwidth switching method is characterized in that it includes:
    发送端接收业务信息;The sender receives business information;
    所述发送端采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送所述业务信息,所述业务信息位于第一帧中;The sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the service information to the receiving end, where the service information is located in the first frame;
    所述发送端采用所述第二符号带宽向所述接收端发送所述业务信息和冗余信息,所述业务信息和所述冗余信息位于第二帧中,采用所述第一符号带宽传输所述业务信息的时长与采用所述第二符号带宽传输所述业务信息和所述冗余信息的时长相同。The sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the service information and redundant information to the receiving end, the service information and the redundant information are located in a second frame, and the first symbol bandwidth is used for transmission The duration of the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  23. 一种带宽切换方法,其特征在于,包括:A bandwidth switching method is characterized in that it includes:
    接收端采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务信息,所述业务信息位于第一帧中;The receiving end uses the first symbol bandwidth to receive service information from the sending end, where the service information is located in the first frame;
    所述接收端采用第二符号带宽从所述发送端接收所述业务信息和所述冗余信息,所述业务信息和所述冗余信息位于第二帧中,采用所述第一符号带宽传输所述业务信息的时长与采用所述第二符号带宽传输所述业务信息和所述冗余信息的时长相同。The receiving end uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the service information and the redundant information from the transmitting end, the service information and the redundant information are located in a second frame, and the first symbol bandwidth is used for transmission The duration of the service information is the same as the duration of using the second symbol bandwidth to transmit the service information and the redundant information.
  24. 一种带宽切换方法,其特征在于,包括:A bandwidth switching method is characterized in that it includes:
    发送端接收业务的第一信息和业务的第二信息;The sending end receives the first information of the service and the second information of the service;
    所述发送端采用第一符号带宽向接收端发送所述第一信息,所述第一信息位于第一帧中;The sending end uses the first symbol bandwidth to send the first information to the receiving end, where the first information is located in the first frame;
    所述发送端采用第二符号带宽向所述接收端发送所述第二信息,所述第二信息位于第二帧中,采用第一符号带宽传输所述第一信息的时长与采用第二符号带宽传输所述第二信息的时长相同,所述第一帧中携带所述第一信息的符号数大于所述第二帧中携带所述第二 信息的符号数。The sending end uses the second symbol bandwidth to send the second information to the receiving end, where the second information is located in a second frame, and the first symbol bandwidth is used to transmit the first information for a duration different from using the second symbol The bandwidth for transmitting the second information has the same duration, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame.
  25. 一种带宽切换方法,其特征在于,包括:A bandwidth switching method is characterized in that it includes:
    接收端采用第一符号带宽从发送端接收业务的第一信息,所述第一信息位于第一帧中;The receiving end uses the first symbol bandwidth to receive the first information of the service from the transmitting end, where the first information is located in the first frame;
    所述接收端采用第二符号带宽从所述发送端接收所述业务的第二信息,所述第二信息位于第二帧中,采用所述第一符号带宽传输所述第一信息的时长与采用所述第二符号带宽传输所述第二信息的时长相同,所述第一帧中携带所述第一信息的符号数大于所述第二帧中携带所述第二信息的符号数。The receiving end uses the second symbol bandwidth to receive the second information of the service from the transmitting end, the second information is located in the second frame, and the time length for transmitting the first information using the first symbol bandwidth is equal to The duration of transmitting the second information using the second symbol bandwidth is the same, and the number of symbols carrying the first information in the first frame is greater than the number of symbols carrying the second information in the second frame.
  26. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统包括:A communication system, characterized in that, the communication system includes:
    如权利要求1至7所述的发送端和如权利要求8至12所述的接收端;The sending end according to claims 1 to 7 and the receiving end according to claims 8 to 12;
    或者,or,
    如权利要求13至16所述的发送端和如权利要求17至21所述的接收端。The transmitting end according to claims 13 to 16 and the receiving end according to claims 17 to 21.
  27. 一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求22至25中任意一项所述的方法。A computer program product containing instructions, which is characterized in that when it runs on a computer, the computer executes the method according to any one of claims 22 to 25.
  28. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求22至25中任意一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising instructions, which when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 22 to 25.
PCT/CN2020/120343 2019-10-18 2020-10-12 Sending end, receiving end, and bandwidth switching method WO2021073471A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910995743.XA CN112688883B (en) 2019-10-18 2019-10-18 Sending end, receiving end and bandwidth switching method
CN201910995743.X 2019-10-18

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021073471A1 true WO2021073471A1 (en) 2021-04-22

Family

ID=75445172

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/120343 WO2021073471A1 (en) 2019-10-18 2020-10-12 Sending end, receiving end, and bandwidth switching method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN112688883B (en)
WO (1) WO2021073471A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160014740A1 (en) * 2011-12-16 2016-01-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Communication support for low capability devices
CN105850070A (en) * 2013-12-23 2016-08-10 高通股份有限公司 LTE hierarchical burst mode
WO2019071498A1 (en) * 2017-10-11 2019-04-18 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless communication method, network device and terminal device

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101400136A (en) * 2007-09-29 2009-04-01 华为技术有限公司 Uplink data transmission method and device, method and device for converting slot configuration
CN103501217B (en) * 2008-12-22 2017-01-04 Lg电子株式会社 Use the data transmission method of Frame
CN101902427B (en) * 2009-06-01 2015-01-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Frame structure and configuration method and communication method thereof
US9197363B2 (en) * 2010-04-13 2015-11-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for receiving downlink signal
WO2014086040A1 (en) * 2012-12-07 2014-06-12 华为技术有限公司 Adaptive wave channel bandwidth switching method and system
CN107925670B (en) * 2015-11-27 2020-06-16 华为技术有限公司 Channel adjusting method, corresponding device and system
CN109314595B (en) * 2016-07-21 2020-10-09 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for transmitting data
CN108024350B (en) * 2016-10-28 2021-10-19 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Dynamic time allocation method and device
CN108696295B (en) * 2017-04-07 2021-12-31 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for transmitting data based on power line system

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160014740A1 (en) * 2011-12-16 2016-01-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Communication support for low capability devices
CN105850070A (en) * 2013-12-23 2016-08-10 高通股份有限公司 LTE hierarchical burst mode
WO2019071498A1 (en) * 2017-10-11 2019-04-18 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless communication method, network device and terminal device

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "Bandwidth adaptation and scalable design in NR", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #88; R1-1701644, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, 6 February 2017 (2017-02-06), Athens, Greece; 20170213 - 20170217, XP051220526 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN112688883B (en) 2023-03-24
CN112688883A (en) 2021-04-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7079599B2 (en) Multi-mode quadrature amplitude modulation receiver for high rate wireless personal area networks
US7715425B2 (en) Channel adaptation synchronized to periodically varying channel
CA3088402C (en) Systems and methods for a universal data link with demodulation and modulation only processing at intermediate nodes
CN103404226A (en) Method and device for data transmission
JP5494673B2 (en) Communication apparatus and communication control method
MXPA01006736A (en) Handset time synchronisation to a wireless telephone base station.
WO2021073471A1 (en) Sending end, receiving end, and bandwidth switching method
CN109417395A (en) A kind of data send, received method and apparatus
AU720494B2 (en) Initialisation protocol for data rates
KR20000048446A (en) Transceiver prerotation based on carrier offset
CN104052569B (en) Method and device for switching MCS
JP2004297381A (en) Radio communication method and radio communication relay device
EP2840861B1 (en) Peer-to-peer wireless communication-based transmission method and device
JP3800502B2 (en) Orthogonal frequency division multiplex signal transmitter and orthogonal frequency division multiplex signal receiver
CN106878577B (en) Cable modem online control method and device
JP2019186886A (en) Signal transmission device, signal transmission system, and method
JP2003009208A (en) Portable telephone system and synchronous relay system used for the same
CN107211279A (en) Sending method, sending control method and communicator
KR101020952B1 (en) Terminal apparatus of high-speed radio transmiting system
CN115865271A (en) E-band millimeter wave point-to-point transmission method and device
CN115226128A (en) Multimode emergency communication method and system for recovering 5G communication
WO2018137192A1 (en) Signal transmission channel processing method, device, and system
MXPA99012057A (en) Transceiver prerotation based on carrier offset
JP2003060608A (en) Transmitter/receiver
JP2008154297A (en) Data transmission apparatus and data transmission system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20876552

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20876552

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1